IxB Software (3.16)

Software

Introduction

In this section, you can find the basic information about the product and also the formatting conventions used in the topics.

Liabilities and Warnings

General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

This product offers the possibility to process personal identifiable information such as system user name, role and IP-address. The purpose of this processing capability could be to enhance quality control through traceability and proper access management.

If you decide to process personal data you need to be aware of and comply with relevant personal data protection rules, including, in the EU the GDPR as well as other applicable laws, directives and regulations. Atlas Copco can in no way be held liable for any use made by you of the product.

Radio Equipment Directive (EU) 2014/53 (RED) and Commission Delegated Regulation (EU 2022/30) supplementing RED

Radio equipment that communicates via internet and is placed on the EU and the EEA market on or after 1 August 2025 must comply with cybersecurity requirements in RED.
Software versions with earlier release number than 3.14.8 does not comply with the cybersecurity requirements in RED.
It is prohibited to install non-compliant software in products placed on the market on or after 1 August 2025 for the usage in the EU and EEA. 
Check serial number to identify the correct date for when the product is placed on the market.
Downgrading to using a software version with an earlier release number than 3.14.8 cancels regulatory compliance within the EU and the EEA and exposes the product to cybersecurity risks.
Use of a software version with an earlier release number than 3.14.8 is on the sole risk and liability of the customer. Atlas Copco assumes no liability whatsoever for any of the potential implications arising from the use of a software version with an earlier release number.

Liability

Many events in the operating environment may affect the tightening process and shall require a validation of results. In compliance with applicable standards and/or regulations, we hereby require you to check the installed torque and rotational direction after any event that can influence the tightening result. Examples of such events include but are not limited to:

initial installation of the tooling system
change of part batch, bolt, screw batch, tool, software, configuration or environment
change of air- or electrical connections
change in line ergonomics, process, quality procedures or practices
changing of operator
any other change that influences the result of the tightening process

The check should:

Ensure that the joint conditions have not changed due to events of influence.
Be done after initial installation, maintenance or repair of the equipment.
Occur at least once per shift or at another suitable frequency.

Warnings

NOTICE

Changing parameters may lead to a decrease in tool performance and may also slow down the production.

WARNING

Risk of Property Damage or Severe Injury

Ensure that you read, understand and follow all instructions before operating the tool. Failure to follow all the instructions may result in electric shock, fire, property damage and/or severe bodily injury.

Read all Safety Information delivered together with the different parts of the system.
Read all Product Instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the different parts of the system.
Read all locally legislated safety regulations regarding the system and parts thereof.
Save all Safety Information and instructions for future reference.

About the User Guide

This user guide describes how to set up and configure an IxB tool using the IxB Software.

In this Section

Revision History

Release Number	Revision Date	Revision Description
item	item	none
3.16	03/2026	NEW content: Step Configuration Stages Direction Target Angle Limits Trigger Lost Tightening Programs Rotate Tightening Program and Error Reporting Validation Validation Error Reporting Validate a Tool with a Tightening Program Tightening Program Configuration - General Parameters Attachment Tuning UPDATED content: Event Codes Tightening Steps Maintenance Event Codes Configuring Channels Configuring a Wireless Client Configuring the Tool as a Wireless Access Point Front End Information Update Software Version Exporting and Importing Configurations Start-up Progress Indications Exported Information and File Format Configuring the ToolsTalk Connection Performing Factory Reset and Clearing Results Creating a Tightening Program General Virtual Station Adding a Multistep Program Deleting a Multistep Program Start Condition Configuration Options Connecting to a Power Focus Controller (IxB Connect)
3.14	10/2025	NEW content: Connecting to web GUI via factory network when ToolsTalk server is connected to factory ethernet port IA - Impulse Tighten to Angle / Loosen to Angle AP - Adaptive Pulse Machine Capability Test Mode Active - 10148 Toggles Machine Capability Mode - 10152 Connecting to web GUI via service Ethernet port Working with Automation Rules Radio Equipment Directive (EU) 2014/53 (RED) and Commission Delegated Regulation (EU 2022/30) supplementing RED UPDATED content: Event Codes Viewing Tool Information Health Maintenance Tool Diagnostics IAM Software Activation Front End Information Settings for a Multistep Program Tightening Steps IT - Impulse Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque Update Software Version Configuration of the Extended Logging Tool Calibration Adding a Multistep Program Deleting a Multistep Program Home Menu Configuring Channels Configuring a Wireless Client Configuring the Tool as a Wireless Access Point
3.13	09/2024	NEW content: Configuration of HTTPS Certificates UPDATED content: Event Codes ILM Protocol Exported Information and File Format Tool Calibration Tool Diagnostics Prerequisites Target Group Configuring the ToolsNet Connection Configuring the ToolsTalk Connection Getting Started Software Update Troubleshooting Configuring a Wireless Client Viewing Transducer Information Step Monitors Tightening Steps EHMI Multiple Transducer Home Menu Health Configuring a Source Tightening Source Tightening Properties 5G Diagnostics List of Third-Party Licenses System Overview Multistep Configuration User Interface
3.11	02/2024	NEW content: Configuring the storage of Final Torque and Trace IT - Impulse Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque UPDATED content: Configuring Live Result Presentation Settings General Settings Front End Information Tool LEDs Tool Diagnostics Multistep Configuration User Interface Event Codes Settings for a Multistep Program Step Monitors Tightening Steps Step Restrictions Terms and Definitions NOK Results List PCH - Pulse Count High "StepSync" replaced with "controller" or "synchronized tightening"
3.10	06/2023	NEW content: Troubleshooting Matrix Tool Diagnostics Configuring a Stacklight Configuring an Operator Panel ILM Protocol UPDATED content: Event Codes Output Signals PrT - Prevailing Torque Open Protocol Choosing Accessories Hardware Start-up Progress Indications Software Update Troubleshooting Exported Information and File Format General Settings
3.9	01/2023	NEW content: Front End Configuration UPDATED content: Connecting to a Power Focus Controller (IxB Connect) Exporting "System Logs and Information" Event Codes list: Event Codes Tightening steps: Tighten to Torque and Angle, Tighten to Torque or Angle General Virtual Station Step monitors: A - Angle, PTCA - Post Thread Cut Angle
3.8	06/2022	NEW content: Enabling the IxB tool to connect to a Power Focus 6000, or Power Focus 8 controller: Connecting to a Power Focus Controller (IxB Connect) Exporting system logs and information: Exporting "System Logs and Information" Hardware compatibility check at software update: Update Software Version Extended information on hardware modules: Hardware New input signal Set Zero Position - 10135: Input Signals New output signal Tools in Zero Position - 210: Output Signals
3.7	01/2022	NEW content: New Events for board supervision and wrong power source (Event codes 2200 - 2210): Event Codes New output signals: 208 - ToolsTalk connection lost, 206 - Confirm loosening: Output Signals Strategies for returning an open end tool to open position after tightening: Open End Configuration New start-up progress information for tools equipped with EHMI: EHMI Start-up Progress Indications Program monitor Time, and program restrictions Angle and Time: Tightening Program Properties Step monitor Current: Step Monitors Step restriction Current: Step Restrictions Extended logging using log groups: Configuration of the Extended Logging, Configuring the Remote Logging Connection
3.6	06/2021	NEW content: Configurable tool vibrator: 5. Vibrator Configuration of dual transducer tools: Dual Transducer Tool Calibration (TC) tightening step and monitor: Tightening Steps, Step Monitors UPDATED content: Note on new Stand-alone License added: Licenses
3.5	12/2020	NEW content: Function for configuration of WLAN channels: Configuring Channels Function for Statistical Process Control (SPC): SPC - Statistical Process Control Function for configuration of result presentation: Configuring Result Presentation Settings Function for configuration of user permissions: Configuring the PIN Settings Function for viewing server connection status: Viewing Protocol Status Function for synchronizing traces: Viewing Synchronized Traces Function for clearing results: Performing Factory Reset and Clearing Results
3.4	07/2020	NEW content: Open end tuning function: Open End Tuning Tightening program selection: General Settings Software update troubleshooting: Software Update Troubleshooting Maximum number of steps in a tightening program: Adding a Tightening Program Trace Settings: Step Parameters
3.3	03/2020	First release

Relevant Information

Target Group

This user guide is intended for anyone configuring or operating an IxB tool.

In this Section

Prerequisites

Prerequisites

For a complete understanding of the technical aspects in the user guide the following is recommended:

Knowledge about tightening techniques

Conventions

To enhance user understanding, certain formatting conventions are used throughout this document. The formatting conventions used are listed below.

User Guide Conventions
Element	Notation	Description	Output
General emphasis	In the Program workspace.	To make certain text elements stand out, or to highlight.	Text in Bold
Graphical User Interface (GUI) items	Select the Function button.	Any reference to items found on screen in the GUI (for example, command buttons, icon names and field names).	Text in Bold
Graphical User Interface (GUI) Path >	Generally, on the top of the GUI.	Navigation aid which keeps track of the location in the GUI.	For example: Controller > Program > Edit
User input	Enter a Description for the program.	Any text input by the user.	Text in Bold
File names	Enter a File Name for the export.	Files either exported from, or imported into the system.	Text in Bold Italic
Variable and parameter names	Enter a Name for the export.	Variable and parameter names (not values).	Text in Italic
Variable and parameter values	Enter a VALUE for the export.	Variable and parameter values.	Text in BOLD CAPS
System output	Client.Domain.Models.ExportImportConfiguration	Any text output by the system.	Text in Monospace
External links	https://servaid.atlascopco.com www.atlascopco.com https://webbox.atlascopco.com/webbox/dimdrw	Links to external sites that have information connected to the document or subject content. These could include: Technical Product Data Dimensional Drawings Accessories Product Specific Information	Selectable text to external sites
Internal documentation links		Relevant Information - links to information which is directly related to the current topic and needs to be considered for certain configurations that are made. In this Section - links to all the topics within the section, which can be useful when understanding a feature, or configuration. If available, these links will be presented below the text.	Selectable text to internal content

System Overview

A manufacturing system may consist of the functional blocks in the figure:

A	Factory network.	H	Controller factory port: connected to the factory network.
B	ACDC: for storing tightening results and for statistical analysis.	I	Power Focus 6000 controller: used with handheld tools.
C	ToolsTalk 2 server: for configuration and parameter settings for controllers and IxB tools.	J	Handheld battery tool: uses a wireless connection to the controller.
D	Industrial PC (IPC): can be used as client terminal to the ToolsTalk 2 and ToolsNet servers.	K	PF6 Flex controller: used with fixtured tools.
E	Portable computer connected to the factory network: can be used as client terminal to the ToolsTalk 2 and ToolsNet servers.	L	IxB handheld battery tool: uses a wireless connection to the factory network.
F	Service computer: can be connected to the service port of a controller or an IxB tool.	M	The internet cloud.
G	Controller service port: can be used to connect a service computer.	N	Atlas Copco Licensing Portal (ACLP): located at Atlas Copco and provides support to licensed functionality in the Functional Management System (FMS).

The User Interface

Home Menu

The home menu contains the following items:

Menu Item	Description
	Tightening The Tightening tab shows a list of existing tightening programs stored in the tool. Selecting an individual program opens the different menus to configure and set parameters for the selected tightening program.
	Batch Sequence A batch sequence is one or more repetitive tightening programs in various combinations. Batch sequences are created and configured in the Batch sequence tab.
	Sources The Sources tab lists available options for controlling the selection of a tightening program, or a batch sequence, via digital input from different hardware.
	Configurations In this tab the following can be configured: Tool Configuration Socket Selector I/O Expander and I/O Hub General Virtual Station Operator Panel
	Integrated Controller Tool This tab includes items such as: Virtual Station Assign accessories and select accessory configurations. Assign a task to the virtual station either manually or configure how external signals are used to assign the task. Enable communication protocols to factory management systems. Tool Tool model Tool and battery health Service and calibration intervals QA calibration Motor tuning This tab also includes functions for software update and export/import of configuration parameters.
	Reports Displays the latest tightening results, events and NOK ratio.
	Settings This tab is used to set up specific settings such as: Wireless client Server connections Time and date, language preference, PIN Tool alarm settings Event code configurations
	Automation Rules This tab is used to set up automation rules with triggers and actions.
	License Assignment This tab gives an overview of the current license status and license sources.
	Help The Help tab contains the IxB Software user guide.

Icons

The following table gives an overview of the icons and buttons available in the user interface:

Icon	Name	Description
	Back	Return to previous view.
	Home	Go to the Home screen.
	Go to Results	Go to the live results screen.
	Padlock	Opens a dialog box for PIN code.
	Events	Displays the latest tightening events. Define what events to display in the event configurations in the Settings menu.
	Validate	Validates tightening parameters against tool values.
	Add	Adds an item.
	Delete	Deletes an item.
	Protocol Status	Displays the Status Protocol pop-up window, which shows open protocol information and server connection status.
	Notice	Sign showing that a parameter is configured incorrectly.

Installation and Upgrade

In this section, you can find information to help with the initial installation of the product, or upgrading from one version to another.

Installation Restrictions

Web Browser Requirements

Web Browser Requirements

The following web browsers are recommended for the IxB Software user interface:

Firefox
Google Chrome
Microsoft Edge

Licenses

Feature licenses are managed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). This allows customers to tailor tool functions to their specific needs through a dynamic licensing scheme.

Licenses can be obtained for individual features or collections of features and can be deployed across multiple virtual stations. The licenses can be returned to the pool when they are no longer required.

Licenses can be downloaded from the Atlas Copco License Portal (ACLP) and managed/distributed through ToolsTalk, or can be stored on a FMS Portable (USB drive) to be inserted into the tool.

Note that the creation and management of a customer account in the ACLP is not covered in this documentation. Contact the local Atlas Copco representative for more information.

There are three types of licenses:

Virtual Station Type

A fixed collection of features bundled together in a single package. The Virtual Station Type license determines, among other things, how many programs and sequences can be used, which tightening strategies are available, and the type of reporting that can be done. The features contained in each Virtual Station Type are features that often are used in conjunction with each other, or which have internal dependencies that require the presence of other features in the package. Virtual Station Types licenses are assigned in their entirety to a virtual station. The virtual station can then make use of all features contained in the Virtual Station Type. In order to be able to perform tightenings, a Virtual Station has to be assigned a Virtual Station Type license. Depending on the license type, various tightening options will be enabled or blocked.
Virtual Station Feature

Individual features can be purchased as a single licenses to complement the virtual station type licenses.
Controller Feature

In order to perform a tightening the Integrated Controller License must be stored on the tool. (Not applicable when the Stand-alone Licence is assigned to the virtual station.)

License Sources

Licenses used on a tool can be pulled from several different sources. The number of simultaneous sources is limited to 10 (either 10 FMS Portable sources, or one License Server (TT2) in addition to nine FMS Portable sources). If a license is to be added from a source when the source limit (10) has been reached, all licenses from one source need to be removed from the tool to make room for licenses from the other source.

The Source Overview tab (License assignment > Source Overview) provides an overview of the licenses installed on the tool, as well as where they were installed from. A maximum number of 10 different sources can be displayed here, and each will be designated with FMS P (for FMS Portable, or dongle), or License Server (TT2).

Selecting any license source will present that source's detailed license source information. It lists the source name and type, as well as the number and type of licenses in each category (Virtual Station Type, Virtual Station Feature and Controller Feature).

Configuration of features governed by licenses can be done even in the absence of an installed license, for example, configuration of tightening programs. Assigning these features to a tool or virtual station is also possible. However, running the feature without a valid license will require the installation of the appropriate license.

License enforcement is performed at two stages: assignment and runtime (trigger pressed). If a feature for which no license is installed is assigned to a virtual station, a red exclamation mark will appear in the tool or task section of the user interface (depending on what is missing). If a feature, for which no license is installed, is started, an event will be presented informing which license is missing. It will not be possible to proceed without a correct license installed. Running an unlicensed feature will, in most cases, result in a locked tool.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HanD0wI-w9k

In this Section

Installing Licenses on the Tool

Note that license sources are limited to one (1) License Server (TT2) and nine FMS Portables (USB dongles) simultaneously. Licenses are either installed via the server (ToolsTalk2) or via FMS Portable. If the license source limit is reached, all licenses from one source need to be removed from the tool in order to add licenses from another source.

Existing licenses are checked against the license server every two hours. If no response from the license server is obtained within a period of 14 days, the affected licenses will be revoked. The user will also be warned when licenses are about to expire. When a license is within 7 days of expiration, the user will be presented with a warning once every two hours. If licenses are not renewed, they will expire and the affected functions will no longer be available.

Installing Licenses from the Server

Server based licenses are distributed through ToolsTalk2. For instructions on how to install server licenses, refer to ToolsTalk2 User Guide.

To enable license installation using ToolsTalk2, the correct license server settings must be configured in the tool.

Configure the tool for server license installation

Go to Settings in the home menu ans select Server connections in the left pane.
In the Atlas Copco License Manager field, set the switch to On.
Insert the correct Server port and Server host IP address (usually the same as the IP address for ToolsTalk2).
Select Apply.

Installing Licenses from FMS Portable (USB Dongle)

The Functionality Management System (FMS) uses a special FMS Portable device to transfer functionality to and from a tool. The USB flash drive contains both a general purpose memory area and a trusted storage area that is only accessible by the License Manager in a tool. The purchased feature items are downloaded from Atlas Copco to the general purpose area. The first time the FMS Portable is inserted into a tool with a License Manager, the file is detected and decoded and the feature items are transferred to the trusted storage area that is only accessible from a License Manager.

Install licenses using a USB dongle

Connect the USB dongle to the tool via a USB adapter cable.
Prior to the license installation, make sure that the tool has a wireless connection set up to the factory network.
The USB License Management window will appear. The Pool column will show the total license count on the tool from all sources. The Available on FMS P column shows the licenses available on this dongle, while the From this FMS P column shows the number of licenses that have been moved to this tool from this particular FMS P.
Select the left-pointing arrow next to the license you want to install on the tool.
The number in the Available on FMS P column will decrease by 1 and the number in the From this FMS P column will increase by 1.

Removing Licenses from the Tool

Removing Licenses Installed on the Server

For instructions on removing server-installed licenses, refer to the ToolsTalk2 User Guide.

Removing FMS Portable-installed Licenses

Connect the USB dongle to the tool via a USB adapter cable.
Prior to the license removal, make sure that the tool has a wireless connection set up to the factory network.
If the USB License Manager window is not visible, go to License Assignment in the home menu.
Select the USB icon in the top right of the window. The USB License Manager dialog box appears.
Select the right-pointing arrow next to the license that is to be removed from the tool.
Licenses that are assigned to the virtual station can be removed from the tool. However, as a result the virtual station cannot be used.

Upgrading

Software Versions

Two software versions can be installed in the tool simultaneously. Installing a second version of the software is useful when performing upgrades on multiple tools. When production is ready for switching to the upgraded software, activation of the new software version is done from the IxB Software user interface, or with ToolsTalk 2.

In this Section

Software Activation

The tool can store two installed software versions. By using the Software activation, it is possible to choose which software version to use.

Make sure to keep the battery connected to the tool throughout the procedure.

Activate a software version

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Software in the left pane.
Select Stored in the Software Activation window.

The tool is automatically restarted for the activation to take effect.

Update Software Version

Make sure to keep the battery connected to the tool throughout the procedure.

Go to the Integrated Controller Tool menu and select Software in the left pane.
Go to the Software Update field and select BROWSE.
Updating the software to a newer version will transfer all configurations to the new version.
Updating the software to an older version will reset all configurations to the default state.
Browse and choose the zip file with the applicable software and follow the instructions to finish installation.
If the software package to be installed is not compatible with the tool hardware, the software update will be cancelled. A warning message will be shown, pointing out which parts of the hardware that caused the cancellation.

For information on the current tool hardware, go to Integrated Controller Tool > Hardware.

If the controller application fails to start repeatedly the controller will boot up in rescue mode. In rescue mode a new firmware can be installed. The rescue image is distributed with the software update and can be updated if a newer rescue image exists.

Do not power off the system during rescue image update. The system will reboot when starting the update.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-Vq6uKaKfcA

Relevant Information

Hardware

Software Update Troubleshooting

An error during the software update will be indicated by the LED ring as follows:

Tightening direction LEDs are flashing eight times, followed by steady light for half a second. This flash pattern will be repeated until the tool automatically performs a restart. To view the error message, connect the tool to the IxB Software web user interface. As the IxB Software is loading, the error message will be displayed.

Possible error messages with corresponding resolve actions are listed below:

Error message	Resolve action
Board hardware information not valid	Contact Market Support
Device hardware information not valid	Contact Market Support
File contents corrupt	Replace IAM (SD card)
File incompatible with hardware	Replace IAM (SD card)
File not found	Replace IAM (SD card)
File read error	Replace IAM (SD card)
Target communication timeout	Replace part defined as target
Target reception error	Replace part defined as target
Target unexpected reply	Replace part defined as target
Target unreachable	Replace part defined as target
Target transmission error	Replace part defined as target

Start-up Progress Indications

When starting the tool, the EHMI will indicate if a software update is in progress by displaying the following messages:

Check for software update
Updating <module> App/Boot
Starting controller

NOTICE

Do NOT pull the battery from the tool during the software update procedure. The tool can get damaged.

A module is a subsystem or component which is part of the IxB tool, and updated through the IxB Software.

Module (as shown on the display)	Description
MRT	Main board
MCB	Power module
FTS	Front transducer
EHMI	Extended HMI
BHMI	Basic HMI
RHMI	Round HMI

If an error occurs during the software update, the following message will be displayed:

Software update failed (error Id)

The error Id corresponds to error messages, as follows:

Id	Error Message	Description	Suggested Action
0	None	-	-
1	Module board info not valid	Module produced with incorrect data	Replace module
2	Module device information not valid	Module produced with incorrect data	Replace module
3	Module file corrupt	File system is corrupt	Replace IAM
4	Module firmware not compatible with hardware	Software not compatible with hardware	Update to later release
5	Module firmware file not found	File system is corrupt	Replace IAM
6	Error when reading module firmware file	File system is corrupt	Replace IAM
7	Communication timeout when trying to update module	Damage on the connector/cable or the module	Replace IAM
8	Error when receiving data from module	Damage on the connector/cable or the module	Service the tool
9	Unexpected reply from module	Damage on the connector/cable or the module	Service the tool
10	Module unreachable	Damage on the connector/cable or the module	Service the tool
11	Error when transmitting data to module	Damage on the connector/cable or the module	Service the tool
12	System on backup battery	System is running on backup battery	Restart tool - do not remove battery or power adapter until update is complete

Rescue Mode

After three unsuccessful restarts the tool will enter Rescue Mode. In this mode it is possible to update the software and/or perform disk management.

Update software in Rescue Mode

Connect the tool to the USB port of the PC. Open a web browser and type in the address 169.254.1.1.
In the Rescue Mode user interface, go to the Software Update tab.
Select the file system to be updated and browse for the correct file.
Select the Update button.
Go to the Power tab and reboot the system.

Perform disk management in Rescue Mode

Connect the tool to the USB port of the PC. Open a web browser and type in the address 169.254.1.1.
In the Rescue Mode user interface, go to the Disk Management tab.
Choose to repair file system or clean data, as appropriate.
Select the Submit button.
Go to the Power tab and reboot the system.

Configuration

In this section, you can find detailed information about how to create, modify, and verify product settings.

Configuration Options

The configuration and setting up of the tool can be done in the following ways:

IxB Software:The tool can be directly connected to a PC via a USB cable. If the tool is connected to a wireless network and its IP address is known, it can be accessed from a computer anywhere on the network.
ToolsTalk 2: If the tool is connected to a ToolsTalk 2 server, a ToolsTalk 2 client (PC) can access all connected tools and controllers through ToolsTalk 2. IxB tools, as well as Power Focus 6000 controllers and Flex controllers can be accessed.
ToolsTalk 2 in Station Setup mode: Provides a ToolsTalk 2 interface on a PC without a server installation. The PC is connected to the controller service port and provides access to one controller at a time.
Controller: This is applicable to Power Focus 6000 controllers which have a touchscreen. A controller can be configured regardless whether it is connected to the network or not.

This user guide covers the IxB Software. For information about ToolsTalk 2 and Power Focus 6000, refer to ToolsTalk 2 User Guide and Power Focus 6000 User Guide.

Depending on whether the tool is connected to a controller, settings may be available on the controller or on the tool.

Getting Started

To create a better overview of the system, this section provides a quick guide covering the basic steps required to get started. The section does not explain every feature of the system, but instead focuses on the most basic ones.

Get started

Connect the tool to a PC and access the user interface. Set up a wireless connection between the tool and the network.
Define a tightening program containing all relevant parameters of a tightening, for example target angle and target torque.

If applicable, create a batch sequence. One or several tightening programs can be added to a batch sequence which works as a series of tightening programs. A batch sequence can for example be a certain number of tightenings with a tightening program, or a sequence of different tightening programs.
Assign a task to the virtual station of the tool. The task can be either a tightening program, a batch sequence, or a specified digital input (from for example a barcode scanner).

In this Section

Accessing the IxB Software User Interface

Remove the cover of the tool's USB connection port.
Connect the tool to the USB-port of the PC.
Open a web browser and type in the address of the IxB Software user interface: 169.254.1.1.
To access the user interface wirelessly, refer to the instructions in the section Configure a Wireless Client.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ffQHjRwbIgw

Relevant Information

Configuring a Wireless Client

Creating a Tightening Program

Create a Tightening Program

Go to Tightening in the home menu.
Select the plus icon.
In the Choose Operation Mode window, select Tightening.
Open the Properties window. Enter a valid Maximum Torque Limit for the specific tool and press Enter. Close the Properties window.
Open the Steps pane on the right. Drag and drop the steps to create a tightening program.
Set Monitors and Restrictions for each step as applicable, and press Enter.

The tightening program must have a loosening program configured.

Create a loosening program

Go to Tightening in the home menu.
Select the plus icon.
In the Choose Operation Mode window, select Loosening.
Open the Properties window. Enter a valid Maximum Torque Limit for the specific tool and press Enter. Close the Properties window.
Open the Steps pane on the right. Drag and drop the steps to create a loosening program.
Set Monitors and Restrictions for each step as applicable and press Enter.

Add the loosening program to the tightening program

Go to Tightening in the home menu and select a tightening program from the list.
Expand Properties by selecting the arrow.
Under General settings, select Loosening Program and choose a loosening program in the list. Press Enter.

Assigning a Task to the Virtual Station

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu.
Under Virtual Station > Task select Choose task.
Choose a Tightening program from the list.

Relevant Information

Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station

Connecting to web GUI via service Ethernet port

Make sure the DHCP settings are enabled on the computer.

Perform the following steps to connect to the web GUI:

Connect to the service ethernet port.
Open a web browser.
In the address field, type 169.254.1.1.
The web GUI opens.

Working with the Tightening Tab

This section describes the multistep tightening strategy and how to create a tightening program.

Some features require licenses distributed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). Whereas configuration of features is possible without specific licenses, the assignment and use of those features will require the correct license to be installed on the tool.

WARNING

Risk of injury

A change in the configuration of the tightening program may cause unexpected torque, rotational direction, or speed in the system(s) where the tightening program is currently in use. This could result in severe bodily injury and/or property damage.

Check the tightening program configurations after adding a new program or after applying changes to an existing program.

Relevant Information

Licenses

In this Section

Step Configuration Stages

The controller tightening programs need parameters to be set in order to execute the programs. Selecting a Strategy and either the Target torque or Target angle are mandatory. Other settings are optional. It is also possible to monitor the tightening as it progresses by adding limits within which the torque or angle rotation must remain.

The tightening procedure is divided into four stages: Start, Rundown, Tightening and Stop.

The figure is typical of how tightenings are described. The curves represent how speed, torque and angle vary over time. All tightening strategies are represented in this way. Parameters, monitors and limits are also shown in detailed figures.

A task is defined from the time a trigger is pressed until the tightening target is reached, or an error occurs.

A combination of a tightening strategy together with specific parameter settings forms a tightening program.

The user can create many different tightening programs, and one of them is selected at runtime.

In this Section

Start Stage

The optional Start step initiates the tightening, enables socket and thread finding, and the option to detect rehits.

In this Section

Direction

Direction

Direction defines the tightening direction of the spindle to clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).

Parameter	Description	Default value
Thread direction	Defines the tightening direction of the spindle.	Clockwise

Stage Parameter Descriptions

Target Angle Limits

With Target angle limits set, it is possible to monitor whether the nut is turned the desired angle during the tightening.

Parameter	Description	Default value
Angle limits	Choose the section of the tightening, in degrees, in which to monitor the angle. Auto: The angle monitoring limits are automatically calculated by the controller. Manual: The angle monitoring limits are entered manually.	Auto
Angle min	Angle value for lower angle limit.	0°
Angle max	Angle value for upper angle limit.	0°

Parameter

Description

Default value

Angle limits

Choose the section of the tightening, in degrees, in which to monitor the angle.

Auto: The angle monitoring limits are automatically calculated by the controller.
Manual: The angle monitoring limits are entered manually.

Auto

Angle min

Angle value for lower angle limit.

0°

Angle max

Angle value for upper angle limit.

0°

The parameter Measure angle at can have different values. The parameter is only available when angle monitoring is turned on for the tightening program used. By default the angle is measured at Max angle value. The possible values of the parameter are listed in the table below.

Name	Description
Value at peak torque	Measures the angle at the highest torque value.
Max angle value	Measures the highest angle during tightening.

Trigger Lost

In the Result Evaluation window of the program tightening stage, NOK on trigger lost switch controls whether or not it is allowed to release the tool trigger before the target condition has been reached. The setting can be set to On or Off. Below is a description of the two states.

Switch setting	Description
On	Releasing the trigger before reaching the target condition will result in a NOK tightening.
Off	Releasing the trigger before reaching the target condition will result in an OK tightening as long as all other conditions have been met.

The default behavior is that premature trigger release shall not be allowed.

Tightening Programs

Select the tightening program to choose how the software applies clamping force to the joint. Each joint needs a different method to apply the correct clamping force and reduce unwanted effects during use.

In this Section

Rotate

The Rotate strategy is primarily a strategy for testing and demonstration purposes. When the tool is allowed to rotate freely, it turns the socket the specified angle using the lowest torque possible.

Parameter	Description	Default value
Target speed	Target speed for the Rotate strategy.	69 rpm
Target angle	Angle to turn the spindle.	360°
Torque max	Defines the upper torque limit during program execution. If Torque max is exceeded, the tightening is aborted, and an error message is given. The tightening will be considered NOK.	1 Nm

Tightening Program and Error Reporting Validation

The tightening program automatically validates with the parameter rules and tool properties as soon as new values are entered or changes are made. If the validation detects any errors, they are reported with an error description.

In this Section

Validation Error Reporting

If the validation gives an error, the error is displayed with an icon next to the parameter or parameters causing the error. When you tap on the icon, a short description of the error is given.

Example (See image):

Target angle is set to 800° with Final angle limits set to Angle min 900° and Angle max 1000°.
When you tap on the validation error icon next to the Angle min parameter, a short description of the error is given, saying that Angle min is greater than Target angle.
To fix the error, adjust the Angle min value so that it is lesser than Target angle, and the error icon will disappear.

Validate a Tool with a Tightening Program

On the home view, go to the Tightening tab. If required, select a specific program in the list.
Validation can be performed both for the entire list of programs, or for individual programs.
Select the Validate Program icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.
In the pop-up window, choose the tool to validate the tightening program against, and select Validate.
If a tightening program is not compatible with the selected tool, it will be indicated by a red circle with an exclamation point.

Multistep Tightening Strategy

A multistep tightening is a tightening done in several steps. The number of steps and the type of the steps vary depending on the tightening to be done. A multistep tightening program is highly configurable, including monitoring functions and restrictions. A total of 16 steps can be added to a multistep program.

Restrictions are used to make sure the tightening stops if something unexpected occurs. These restrictions could, for example, test that a maximum set torque is not reached or that a part of the multistep tightening does not take too long to run. Every step can have up to four restrictions each. Each step has mandatory step restrictions and optional step restrictions. The mandatory restrictions are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program.

Monitors are used to verify that the tightening was made according to the specification. This can be, for example, angle limits or torque limits. Every step can have up to eight monitors each. Each step has mandatory step monitors and optional step monitors. The mandatory monitors are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program.

In this Section

Multistep Configuration User Interface

Tightening and multistep programs that appear dimmed indicate that they are Global Programs distributed from ToolsTalk. These programs cannot be changed via the controller GUI. Global programs can only be modified through ToolsTalk. Refer to the ToolsTalk user documentation for more information.

The user interface for configuring a multistep program can be divided into three main areas:

In the top there is a drop-down menu containing the Properties of the multistep tightening program. Here general properties such as program name, overall program monitor and validation can be set.
To the right there are three tabs containing the Steps, Monitors and Restrictions that can be used to build the multistep program. To use any of the items, select the appropriate tab, and drag the item in the list to the tightening area. Depending on its function, either drop the item between the beginning and the end of the program (for steps), or on top of a particular step (for monitors and restrictions).
The main area of the user interface is made up of the tightening area. This is the area that includes all the steps in the tightening program.

Tightening Steps

The availability of tightening steps, monitors and restrictions depends on the license installed on the controller.

General Parameters

The following step parameters are common for many of the step types. The parameters are set in the step properties window which is displayed when selecting a step in the tightening program.

Parameter	Description
Name	Name of the step.
Rotational direction	Each of the tightening steps can run either forward, that is to make a tightening, or reverse, to loosen the screw slightly. The arrows indicate this direction. Many of the tightening steps have a direction hard-coded to forward, for example Tighten to Angle, or Tighten to Torque. Steps such as Loosen to Angle or Loosen to Torque have their direction automatically set to reverse. The reverse setting is not allowed for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end. The tightening direction of the tightening program must be the same as the tightening direction of the open end tool for a tightening to be allowed to be run. It is possible to assign a loosening program to a tightening program for an open end tool, but if the direction switch is set to run the loosening program, the tool will be locked.
Step category	For each step, there is an option to choose a step category. By selecting step category, the NOK tightenings will be listed in the event result view with related detailed status together with the corresponding multistep error information. If no selection is made, the detailed status will be set to uncategorized multistep error. The related detailed status can be customized.
Angle window	A joint is considered Hard if the screw is tightened to its full torque and it rotates 30 degrees (or less) after it has been tightened to its snug point. A Soft joint rotates 720 degrees or more after it has been tightened to its snug point. The hardness parameter defines the Angle Window for the gradient calculation. The harder the joint - the smaller the angle window.
Speed Ramp / Acceleration (only available in ToolsTalk 2)	For most of the steps it is possible to specify how the acceleration to the target speed should be achieved. Three different settings are possible; Hard, Soft and Manual. The acceleration defined will be used whenever a step is started. Regardless whether the tool is already running with speed at the beginning of the step, the ramp will be used to accelerate to the target speed of the step. This will be the case even if the speed at the start of the step is higher, or lower than the target speed.
Speed ramp - Hard and Soft mode	Hard: 2000 rpm/s (Speed Ramp between 1000 and 10000 rpm/s is a Hard acceleration.) Soft: 500 rpm/s (Speed Ramp between 200 and 1000 rpm/s is a Soft acceleration.)
Speed ramp - Manual mode	Speed: Default value: 60 rpm Minimum limit: > 0 Maximum limit: ≤ Tool Max Speed Acceleration: Default value: 500 rpm/s Minimum limit: > 0 Maximum limit: ≤ Tool Max Acceleration
Using speed shifts	1−5 angle triggers or torque triggers can be defined during a step, where the speed will shift. Only 1 adaptive trigger can be used. Within one step, all the speed shift triggers are based on the same property, that is either torque, angle or adaptive. They cannot be mixed within one step. The Torque triggers and Angle triggers must be less than the step target, depending on the type of the step and the trigger type. The Torque trigger and Torque speed also validate against the Max torque and Max speed of the tool. A warning or error indicator occurs whenever the Speed Shift settings exceed either the tool max values, or step max values. It is possible to push the settings to the tool when a tightening program has a warning, but not when a tightening program has an error (fault) indicator. The speed shifts can be added in the Configuration field. To add a speed shift: In the dialog box of a step that can have speed shifts, select Add speed shift. Then, select an angle range or a torque range. The Speed Shift Angle/Torque/Adaptive fields open. Add values according to the table below: Angle/Torque/Adaptive trigger: Must be > 0 Speed: Must be > 0 Speed ramp type: Hard or soft
Brake type	The braking behavior of a multistep tightening program can be controlled at two possible locations in the program: in a step preceding a reversal of direction of the tightening, and/or at the final step of the tightening program. At other locations in the tightening program, the braking parameters will not be available in the step's general settings. Braking can be set to either Ergo stop or Inertia. Inertia will brake the tool completely, while Ergo stop will allow for a more ergonomic slowing down of the tightening. Inertia has no additional parameters. Ergo stop parameters: Adaptive brake: Set the Adaptive Brake to On or Off Ramp time: Only available when Adaptive Brake is set to Off. Insert time in ms.
Exclude in MCT mode	The Exclude in MCT mode option can be turned on for steps in a Multistep program. When using the MCT mode for a Multistep program, steps with Exclude in MCT mode turned on will be excluded. Setting the Exclude in MCT mode option to on in such a way that there is no break before a wait step or direction switch will result in an error in runtime when in MCT mode. Termination Paths and Repair paths are ignored on fixtured systems, i.e. if they are triggered the tightening will be marked as NOK MC tightening. MCT mode is only to be used when testing. Make sure MCT mode is disabled before returning the tool to the production line.

The following tightening steps are not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end:

A - Tighten to Angle / Loosen to Angle
TrR - Loosen to Trigger Release
T - Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque
E - Engage
SR - Socket Release
DT - Tighten to DynaTork
TPT - TensorPulse Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque
IT - Impulse Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque
IA - Impulse Tighten to Angle / Loosen to Angle
AP - Adaptive Pulse
ITrR - Impulse Loosen to Trigger Release

Trace Settings

When the trace configuration is enabled on the program level, the trace resolution can be configured on step level. The setting for Trace Setting defines how the sampling should be done on each specific step.

Parameter	Description
Trace Setting	Program: Use the settings as defined on program level. Manual: The trace sample type from the program level will be used, that is, Time or Angle. Using a different sample rate will override the setting on the program level.
Sample Time	Choose the sample time from the drop-down list (0.25 - 1000 ms)
Sample Angle	Choose the sample angle from the drop-down list (0.25 - 20 degree)

With this trace recording the sample rates will not be the same in all the steps, instead the sample rate depends on the configuration in each step. This means the trace is divided into one trace for each step.

The maximum number of samples in a trace is 4096.

If a tightening produce more than 4096 values a down-sampling will take place. This is done by removing every second trace sample from the whole tightening and when continue the recording with half the resolution. This process will be repeated every time the 4096 sample limit is reached.

If more than 2048 in total was recorded, this process will result in a trace between 2048 and 4096 samples.

If the limit if 4096 samples is reached the configured trace sample times will no longer be followed. Instead the sample times will be doubled or quadrupled etc., depending on how many times the down sampling has taken place. Since all steps are down sampled the relation between the steps will still be the same though. If a step was configured with double sample time compared to another step, this will still be the case in the final trace regardless how many times a down-sampling has occurred.

Trace channel	Note
Torque	Available for all tools equipped with a torque transducer
Angle	Available for all tools
Torque Second	Only available for tools with two torque transducers
Angle Second	Only available for tools with two angle transducers
Current	Available for all tools
Gradient	Available if some step/restriction/monitor produces the gradient values

Available tools for each system type
Power Focus 6000 / Power Focus 8	Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening / Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Flex	IxB
ST	ST	QST	IxB
STR	STR
SL	QST
QST
STB
IxB
Power Focus Connect
XB

A – Tighten to Angle / Loosen to Angle

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST STB IXB

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

A – Tighten to Angle

This step runs the tool until the target angle is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

A – Loosen to Angle

This step runs the tool with the speed n in the backward direction until the angle target is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

This step is not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end.

Parameters

Parameter	Description
Target angle	The angle target. Must be > 0.
Speed	Default: 60 rpm.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed ramp	If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

A	Target Angle

Microvideo

A - Tighten to Angle / Loosen to Angle

C - Clutch

Tools
BCV BCP

Tools

BCV

BCP

This step will run the tool with the programmed Speed in forward direction until the Clutch has been released. When the tool has reported the release of the Clutch the step will finish with OK status.

A tightening program using the Clutch step cannot have any other step assigned.

This step is only valid for the Clutch tools BCV-RE and BCP-RE.

Parameter	Description
Speed Control	One Speed or Two Speed
Final Speed	Sets the final speed of the program [rpm]
Speed Ramp	Switch where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft]
Rehit	Rehit detection set to On or Off
Rehit angle	Sets the rehit angle [°]

CL - Clutch Loosening

Tools
BCV BCP

Tools

BCV

BCP

This step will run the tool with the programmed speed in reverse direction until the tool trigger is released.

A loosening program using the Clutch step can not have any other step assigned.

This step is only valid for the Clutch tools BCV-RE and BCP-RE.

Parameter	Description
Final	Sets the speed of the program [rpm]

DI – Run Until Digital Input

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST

Tools

STR

QST

This steps runs the tool, in the direction defined by parameter Direction, until the input specified by Digital Input goes high or low depending on the value of Stop Condition.

Parameter	Description
Direction	Forward, or Backward
Digital Input	One of the following local digital inputs on the controller can be selected: Local DI 1 Local DI 2 Local DI 3 Local DI 4
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.
Stop Condition	Falling edge: The steps runs until a falling edge is detected after step start. Rising edge: The steps runs until a rising edge is detected after step start. Any edge: The step runs until a falling or a rising edge is detected after step start. Low: The step runs until low value is detected. High: The step runs until high value is detected.
Speed (rpm)	Default: 60 rpm.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed ramp	Available if Speed ramp type is Manual. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Microvideo

DI - Run Until Digital Input

DT – Tighten to DynaTork

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST STB IXB

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This step is not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end.

This step runs the tool with speed n in the forward direction until the Target torque is reached. The tool will then hold the current constant at the DynaTork Percentage of Target torque during the DynaTork time.

To avoid overheating of the tool, it is strongly recommended to never run DynaTork to more than 40% of the maximum torque of the tool.

Parameter	Description
Target torque	The torque target. Must be > 0.
DynaTork Time	The time DynaTork will be active.
DynaTork Percentage	The percentage of Torque target.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed ramp	If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.
Speed (rpm)	Default: 60 rpm.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

A	Target Torque
B	Torque level retained during DynaTork Time
C	Percentage of Ts
D	Percentage of Ts
E	Torque level retained during DynaTork Time
F	DynaTork Time

Microvideo

DT - Tighten to DynaTork

E - Engage

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST IXB

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This step is not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end.

This step runs the tool in both directions until the socket engages the screw. The step continues until Target torque or Target angle is reached, provided that Continue if not Engaged is set to Yes. If Target Angle is reached in any direction, the direction is reversed. Limit the search iterations by entering Max Engage Attempts. If Target Torque is reached in any direction the step will finish with OK status.

Microvideo

E- Engage

Ext - External Result

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST STB IXB BCP BCV External Tool

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

BCP

BCV

External Tool

External result is a strategy used when an OK tightening is indicated by an external digital signal (and not by torque or angle values measured during tightening). This external signal can be provided through any means that can provide a digital signal into the controller (e.g through the I/O bus).

When the signal is sent, the result view (logged data) will show the value of the Target parameter provided in the tightening program (specified torque value, angle value, or text string). These (torque and angle) values do not represent actual measured values, but only inserted text.

Parameter	Description
Torque <Target torque>	Numerical value for desired displayed target torque value. A signal could for example come from a Click Wrench and display <Target torque>.
Angle <Target angle>	Numerical value for desired displayed target angle value. A signal could for example come from a Click Wrench and display <Target angle>.
Text	Alphanumerical string for desired displayed text. For example: "Oil has been changed".

IT - Impulse Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque

Tools
IXB

Impulse steps are valid only for IPB-P tools.

Impulse Tighten to Torque

This step generates tightening pulses in the forward direction, until the torque target is reached.

Impulse Loosen to Torque

This step generates tightening pulses in the backward direction, until torque is below torque target.

Parameter	Description
Torque Target - Ts	Torque Target must range from 0 through the maximum torque of the tool.
Pulse Energy - Pe	Pulse Energy is used to control the amount of energy/current in each pulse. Pulse Energy must range from 10% through 100 %. Default value: 100%.
Auto Speed	On: The tool will run at impulse energy speed both when pulsing and not pulsing. The pulse energy speed will be used through the whole step. Off: The tool will run at the entered speed when not pulsing and at impulse energy speed when pulsing. Different speeds will be used within the step.

Parameter

Description

Torque Target - Ts

Torque Target must range from 0 through the maximum torque of the tool.

Pulse Energy - Pe

Pulse Energy is used to control the amount of energy/current in each pulse.

Pulse Energy must range from 10% through 100 %.
Default value: 100%.

Auto Speed

On: The tool will run at impulse energy speed both when pulsing and not pulsing. The pulse energy speed will be used through the whole step.
Off: The tool will run at the entered speed when not pulsing and at impulse energy speed when pulsing. Different speeds will be used within the step.

MWR - Mechatronic Wrench

Tools
MWR

Mechatronic Wrench is a specialized step that can be used only in conjunction with the Mechatronic Wrench (MWR).

This step cannot be used in combination with other steps. No restrictions can be used with this step. By default, the step has three monitors: Peak Torque, Angle, and Click.

Parameter	Description
Loosening limit	Numerical value for negative torque (i.e. torque in the loosening direction) at which point the tightening result is marked as NOK (False direction of tightening (loosen)); in Nm.
Tool Size	Numerical value for the specific length of the end fitting tool installed on the MWR-TA; in mm.
Tool Bend	Numerical value for the end fitting tool installed on the MWR-TA; in °/Nm.
Rehit Angle Window	Numerical value for the angle for determining if the screw was already tightened if the torque is reached; in °.
Max Angular Rate	Numerical value for the max rate at which the screw can be tightened; in °/s.

RD – Rundown

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST IXB

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

Rundown step is the part of the tightening from when the screw enters the thread until just before the screw head touches the underlying surface and snug point is reached. The torque required during rundown does not contribute to any clamping force.

This step runs the tool with the speed in the forward direction, and depending on the Rundown Type, Torque or Snug the step behavior is as follows:

Rundown Type: To Torque: The step stops when the specified target torque is found.

Rundown Type: To Snug: The snug gradient calculation starts at the specified torque trigger level Tt. If no torque trigger is set the gradient calculation is started at the start of the step.

The slope calculation is made between two angle points A_d degrees apart and is calculated as: (Tn – Tn-1) / (An – An-1) and as soon as two slopes after each other are larger than TSLOPE the snug point is found.

Parameter	Description
Rundown type	To Torque or To Snug.
Target torque	Default: "not set". Must be > 0.
Speed	Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed ramp	If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.
Trigger Torque	If Rundown type is To Snug, the Trigger torque field is displayed. Default: "not set". Must be > 0.
Delta Angle	If Rundown type is To Snug, the Delta angle field is displayed. Default: "0". Must be > 0.
Torque Rate	If Rundown type is To Snug, the Torque rate field is displayed. Default: "0". Must be > 0.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

A	Snug Point
B	Angle Delta
C	Torque Slope
D	Torque Target
E	Torque Trigger

SR - Socket Release

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST STB IXB

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This step is not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end.

This step runs the tool with speed n in the backward direction until the target angle is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

This step is only allowed to use as the last step in the tightening path of a multistep tightening program. However, it is possible to add a sync point after this step.

Parameter	Description
Target angle	The angle target. Default: 3 degrees, must be > 0
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed ramp	If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.
Speed	Default: 60 rpm.

SZP - Set Zero Position

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST

Tools

STR

QST

The step Set Zero Position sends out the signal set zero position to the tool. The position is repeated once every 360 degrees.

With the steps Loosen to Zero Position or Tighten to Zero Position it is possible to return the tool to zero position.

This step does not have any parameters.

The zero position is a specific position stored with either a “Set Zero Position” step or the signal “Set Zero Position”. The position is repeated once every 360 degrees.

T - Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST STB IXB

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

T – Tighten to Torque

This step runs the tool with the programmed speed in forward direction until the target torque is reached.

Parameter	Description
Target torque	The torque target. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed	Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp	If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Microvideo

T - Tighten to Torque

T – Loosen to Torque

This step is not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end.

This step runs the tool with the speed in the backward direction. For the step to be active, the torque must first exceed 110 % of the Target torque. The Target torque should be set to a positive value. After reaching the target torque, the step runs until the torque drops below the target torque.

Parameter	Description
Target torque	The torque target. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed	Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp	If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

A	Target Torque

T+A – Tighten to Torque Plus Angle

Tools
ES STR SL ST SR QST STB IXB

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This step runs the tool until the target torque is reached. From this point it continues to run an additional target angle.

Parameter	Description
Target torque	The torque target. Must be > 0.
Target angle	The angle target. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed ramp	If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.
Speed	Default: 60 rpm.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

A	Target Torque
B	Target Angle

T|A – Tighten to Torque or Angle

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This tightening step runs the tool with the given speed in the forward direction until either the target torque or the target angle is reached.

The torque measurement starts at the beginning of the step.
If the torque trigger is NOT set, the angle measurement starts at the beginning of the step.
If the torque trigger is set, the angle measurement starts when the torque trigger is reached.

The step ends when:
Measured Torque >= Target Torque (Ts)
OR
(Measured Angle - Angle Measured at Torque Trigger) >= Target Angle (As).

Parameter	Description
Target torque (Ts)	Default value: 0. Must be > 0 and <= Tool Max Torque.
Target angle (As)	Default value: 0. Must be > 0.
Torque Trigger (Tt)	Default value: NOT set. Must be > 0 and < Target torque (Ts).
Speed (n)	Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0 and <= Tool Max Speed.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, Speed ramp type opens automatically.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

Tightening to Torque OR Angle, without Torque Trigger set

A	Target Torque
B	Target Angle

Point and click on image to see more information:

Tighten to Torque OR Angle, with Torque Trigger set

A	Target Torque
B	Torque Trigger
C	Target Angle

T&A – Tighten to Torque and Angle

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This tightening step runs the tool with the given speed in the forward direction until both the target torque and the target angle are reached.

The step ends when:
Measured Torque >= Target Torque (Ts)
AND
(Measured Angle - Angle Measured at Torque Trigger) >= Target Angle (As).

Parameter	Description
Target torque (Ts)	Default value: 0. Must be > 0 and <= Tool Max Torque.
Target angle (As)	Default value: 0. Must be > 0.
Torque Trigger (Tt)	Default value: NOT set. Must be > 0 and < Target torque (Ts).
Speed (n)	Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0 and <= Tool Max Speed.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, Speed ramp type opens automatically.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

Tightening to Torque AND Angle, without Torque Trigger set

A	Target Torque
B	Target Angle

Point and click on image to see more information:

Tightening to Torque AND Angle, with Torque Trigger set

A	Target Torque
B	Torque Trigger
C	Target Angle

TC - Torque Calibration

Tools
QST

This step is only supported for multiple transducer tools.

The Torque Calibration step runs the tool with the specified speed in the forward direction until the torque target is reached.

Parameter	Description
Target torque	Must be > 0.
Speed	Must be > 0. Default: 60 rpm.
Transducer	Torque or Torque 2. Default: Torque. Set to Torque 2 in order to calibrate the front transducer.
Adaptive brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

ThCT – Thread Cutting to Torque

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

The Thread Cutting to Torque function enables tightening where the Rundown torque required is greater than the Rundown complete torque, for example when tightening thin layers of metal using self-threading (or self-tapping) screws. The tool runs in forward direction until the Thread Cutting Angle (Aw) is reached. The thread cutting angle window is measured from when the torque passes Thread Cut Trigger Torque (Ttc) for the first time. From the point where Thread cutting angle is reached, the step continues to run until the Target Torque (Tt) is reached.

Parameter	Description
Target torque	Must be > 0.
Thread Cutting Angle Window	Default: 0. Must be > 0.
Trigger Torque	The angle measurement starts at this trigger.
Speed	Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

A	Target Torque
B	Torque Trigger
C	Thread Cutting Angle Window

TPT - TensorPulse Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque

Tools

STR

IXB

Before using TensorPulse tightening/loosening step, it is mandatory that the following license type is installed on the controller:

Low Reaction Strategies

TensorPulse is valid only for the following tools: ETV-STR61-100-13, ETV-STR61-70-13, ETV-STR61-50-10, ITB-P.

This step is not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end or closed end.

TensorPulse Tighten to Torque

This step generates tightening pulses in the forward direction, until the torque target is reached.

TensorPulse Loosen to Torque

This step generates tightening pulses in the backward direction, until torque is below torque target.

If running TensorPulse tightening/loosening step, use the necessary PulseDrive socket/adapter.
If TensorPulse tightening/loosening step runs without the PulseDrive socket/adapter, all the tightenings are NOK. The step error “PulseDrive socket/adapter not detected” shows for no PulseDrive socket/adapter.

Parameter

Description

Torque Target - Ts

Torque Target must range from 0 through the maximum torque of the tool.

Pulse Energy - Pe

Pulse Energy is used to control the amount of energy/current in each pulse.

Pulse Energy must range from 10% through 100 %.
By default, it is set to 100%.

Reaction Force Tuning Factor

Reaction Force Tuning Factor is used to tune the reaction force when running TensorPulse step. It is the power that moves the tool in the opposite direction after each pulse.
High tuning factor makes high reaction force and high pulse frequency; low tuning factor makes low reaction force and low pulse frequency.

Reaction Force Tuning Factor must range from 0 through 100 %.
By default, it is set to 40%.

In the trace, the angle reversal means that the tool rotates backward to enable pulsing, but the bolt head does not necessarily rotate backward because of the PulseDrive socket/adapter.

TrR – Loosen to Trigger Release

Tools

STR

STB

IXB

This step is not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end.

This step runs in the backward direction until the tool trigger is released (loosen). It can only be used as a last step in a program.

For STB tools, this step is only applicable for loosening programs.

Parameter	Description
Speed	Numerical value for rotation speed; in rpm.
Speed Ramp Type	List of options where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft, Manual]

TTTR – Tighten to Trigger Release

Tools

STR

STB

IXB

This step runs until the tool trigger is released (tighten). It can only be used as a last step in a tightening program.

Parameter	Description
Speed	Numerical value for rotation speed; in rpm.
Speed Ramp Type	List of options where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft, Manual]

W – Wait

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

In this step the tool waits until the Wait Type condition is fulfilled. The tool does not rotate while waiting, but Hold condition can be specified.

Parameter	Description
Wait Type	Time: Wait specified time. Signal (valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening): Wait until a rising edge on the signal Continue Step is received.
Wait Time	Number of seconds the tool will stand still - valid only when Time is selected for Wait Type.
Hold Condition	No hold: The tool is waiting without running. Hold torque: While waiting the tool strives to hold the torque it had when entering the step. Hold position: While waiting the tool strives to hold the position it had when entering the step.

WP - Wrench Production

Tools
STwrench

Strategy used for the quality test of the tightening performed with the STwrench.

Parameter

Description

Control Strategy

The Wrench Production step type can be configured with the following control strategies.

Torque: This strategy guides the operator is reaching the desired target torque.
Angle: This strategy guides the operator is reaching the desired target angle.
Torque or Angle: This strategy guides the operator is reaching the desired target angle or desired target torque.
Torque and Angle: This strategy guides the operator in tightening a bolt until both target torque and angle have been reached.
Yield Point: With this strategy, the STwrench detects the yield point automatically. The torque limits specify the range in which the result is OK. Target angle specifies how far beyond the yield point the user may tighten.
Loose: This strategy is used to loosen a tightened screw.
PVT compensate with snug: This strategy guides the operator in reaching the desired target torque for joints with prevailing torque, when the prevailing torque level is higher than the final target.

Based on the control strategy selected, a combination of some of the parameters listed below will be displayed.

Parameters	Description
Target Torque	Defines the target torque for tightening step.
Measure torque at	Specifies where the torque will be measured. Choose between Peak torque or Peak angle. Peak torque: The torque value will be set to the peak torque value. Peak Angle : The torque value will be set to the torque measured at the peak angle.
Angle search limit	This is an offset that is used to the set the torque result value for a tightening. Measure torque at must be set to Peak Angle for this parameter to be available.
Ratchet time	Numerical value for ratchet time which is by default 5000 ms. This allows the operator to release the torque for a while and recharge during the tightening operation. If the Ratchet time is exceeded the result of the tightening is marked as NOK with the reason "Tightening timeout".
End cycle time	Numerical value in ms to indicate the end cycle time. Applied when torque goes below the rundown complete
Torque correction coefficient	The parameter is used to correct the torque reading when using an extension or torque multiplier on the wrench. Default value is 1.
Angle correction	The parameter is used to correct the angle reading when using an extension or torque multiplier on the wrench. Default value is 0.
Target Angle	Defines the target angle for tightening step.
Rehit detection	On or Off. Rehit detection can be used to determine when a tightening is a rehit based on the angle limit setting. Angle limit for rehit is enabled if Rehit direction is set to On.
Linear slope coefficient	Linear slope coefficient characterizes the joint stiffness in the linear part of the curve, as torque/angle slope in the Nm/Deg measurement unit.
Compensate value	Choose between Average torque and Peak torque. The Compensate value specifies how the PVT will be calculated. Average torque - The PVT will be based on an average calculated using the following: Delay monitoring PVT interval PVT distance Prevailing torque min Prevailing torque max Peak torque - The PVT will be based on the peak value measured before snug was detected.
Torque Compensation	This parameter sets if the system compensates for the prevailing torque. If set to On, the system subtracts the prevailing torque from the peak torque before it reports the final torque. If set to Off, the system reports the peak torque as measured.
Delay monitoring	PVT calculation will not start before this window has been passed, starts at tightening start.
PVT interval	Sets how many degrees the PVT window shall be calculated for, start from the PVT distance point.
PVT distance	Sets how many degrees prior to snug the system shall start the PVT window.
Prevailing torque min	Prevailing torque minimum limit.
Prevailing torque max	Prevailing torque maximum limit

Microvideo

WP - Wrench Production

WQ - Wrench Quality

Tools
STwrench

Strategy used for the quality test of the tightening performed with the STwrench.

Parameter

Description

Control Strategy

The Wrench Quality strategy can be configured with the following control strategies.

Residual Torque/Time: This strategy analyzes the torque trace as a function of time. The operator shall execute this operation with a single, steady, movement. The wrench automatically recognizes the breakaway and residual point.
Residual Torque/Angle: This strategy evaluates the residual torque on a joint, looking for the residual point of the Torque/Angle trace.
Residual Torque/Peak: This strategy evaluates the residual torque on a joint as the peak torque necessary to rotate the bolt further.
Loose and Retighten: This strategy loosens a bolt and retightens it back to its original position
Yield Point: With this strategy the wrench detects the yield point automatically. Target Angle specifies how far beyond the yield point the user may tighten.

Based on the control strategy selected, a combination of some of the parameters listed below will be displayed.

Parameters	Description
Ratchet time	Numerical value for ratchet time which is by default 5000 ms. This allows the operator to release the torque for a while and recharge during the tightening operation. If the Ratchet time is exceeded the result of the tightening is marked as NOK with the reason "Tightening timeout".
Torque correction coefficient	The parameter is used to correct the torque reading when using an extension or torque multiplier on the wrench. Default value is 1.
Angle correction	The parameter is used to correct the angle reading when using an extension or torque multiplier on the wrench. Default value is 0.
Target Angle	Defines the target angle for tightening step.
Rehit detection	On or Off. Rehit detection can be used to determine when a tightening is a rehit based on the angle limit setting. Angle limit for rehit is enabled if Rehit direction is set to On.
Linear slope coefficient	Linear slope coefficient characterizes the joint stiffness in the linear part of the curve, as torque/angle slope in the Nm/Deg measurement unit.

Y – Tighten to Yield

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This strategy runs the tool with the speed in the forward direction until the yield point is detected. The yield point is found by monitoring the torque gradient from the point where the torque goes above the Trigger Torque level, calculated based on Torque and Angle distance measurements. The Angle distance parameter is set according to the specified hardness of the joint.

Set the Gradient angle window (for hard joint, for soft joint or for manually setting of the Angle window). If Manual is selected, the Angle Window must be set. A joint is considered Hard if the screw is tightened to its full torque and it rotates 30 degrees or less after it has been tightened to its snug point. A Soft joint rotates 720 degrees or more after it has been tightened to its snug point. The hardness parameter defines the Angle Window for the gradient calculation. The harder the joint - the smaller the angle window.

Parameter	Description
Gradient Angle Window	Specifies Angle Window: For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1 deg. For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20 deg. Manual: Manually set Angle Window.
Angle Window	Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.
Trigger Torque	The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be >= 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.
Damping	Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.
Yield Point Percentage	Must be >= 20 %
Speed	Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Torque Filter Type	The type of the filter: None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation. Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples. Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter. Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.
Cut-off Frequency	Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass: 20 Hz 40 Hz 90 Hz 200 Hz 600 Hz
Number of Samples	Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average: 2 4 6 8 16 32
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

A	Peak Gradient
B	Yield Point
C	Shut-off Point
D	Angle Distance
E	Torque Trigger

YM2 - Tighten to Yield: Method 2

Tools
QST

This step runs the tool with the specified speed in the forward direction until the yield point is detected.

Search for the yield point starts when the torque has reached Tt. The average of the torque over Af degrees is calculated. This procedure is repeated N rs times.

A reference slope is calculated with linear regression over the N rs points. After that, new average values are continuously calculated over A f degrees.

The actual slope is calculated with linear regression over the last N s average points. The yield point is reached when the slope is less than Py % of the reference slope.

Parameter	Description
Target torque	Must be > 0.
Filter angle	Default: 1. Must be > 0.
Number of samples	Default: 6. Must be >=4.
Number pf samples, reference	Default: 6. Must be >=4.
Yield point percentage	Default: 90%. Must be >20%.
Speed	Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.
Speed ramp type	Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.
Speed ramp	If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.
Brake (Valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening, Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening and Flex).	If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached. If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Point and click on image to see more information:

A	Torque Trigger
B	Number of samples, ref
C	Actual Slope
D	Number of samples
E	Reference Slope
F	Filter Angle

ZP - Loosen to Zero Position

Tools

STR

QST

This step runs the tool with the speed (N) in the backward direction until it reaches the zero position. If the total angle to rotate to reach the zero position is less than the minimum angle (Am) degree the rotation will continue for one more revolution, 360 degrees.

The zero position is a specific position stored with either a “Set Zero Position” step or the signal “Set Zero Position”. The position is repeated once every 360 degrees.

Parameters

Parameter	Description
Minimum Angle	Minimum Angle (Am) [°]
Speed	Rotation speed (N) [rpm]. Default value 60 rpm.

ZP - Tighten to Zero Position

Tools

STR

QST

This step runs the tool with the speed (N) in the forward direction until it reaches the zero position. If the total angle to rotate to reach the zero position is less than the minimum angle (Am) degree the rotation will continue for one more revolution, 360 degrees.

The zero position is a specific position stored with either a “Set Zero Position” step or the signal “Set Zero Position”. The position is repeated once every 360 degrees.

Parameters

Parameter	Description
Minimum Angle	Minimum Angle (Am) [°]
Speed	Rotation speed (N) [rpm]. Default value 60 rpm

IA - Impulse Tighten to Angle / Loosen to Angle

Tools
IXB

Impulse steps are valid only for IPB-P tools.

Impulse Tighten to Angle

This step generates tightening pulses in the forward direction, until the target angle is reached.

Impulse Loosen to Angle

This step generates tightening pulses in the backward direction, until the target angle is reached.

Parameter

Description

Angle Target - Ts

Angle Target must be greater than 0.

Pulse Energy - Pe

Pulse Energy is used to control the amount of energy/current in each pulse.

Pulse Energy must range from 10% through 100 %.
Default value: 100%.

Auto Speed

On: The tool will run at impulse energy speed both when pulsing and not pulsing. The pulse energy speed will be used through the whole step.
Off: The tool will run at the entered speed when not pulsing and at impulse energy speed when pulsing. Different speeds will be used within the step.

AP - Adaptive Pulse

Tools
IXB

Adaptive Pulse steps are valid only for IPB-P tools.

Adaptive Pulse

This step will automatically adjust the impulse energy to ensure a fast and reliable tightening with an optimal amount of pulses.

Parameter

Description

Adaptive Pulse Level

The Adaptive Pulse Level can be changed depending on joint characteristics and the wanted speed

ITrR - Impulse Loosen to Trigger Release

Tools used

IXB

Impulse loosen to trigger release steps are valid only for IPB-P tools.

This step runs in the backward direction until the tool trigger is released (loosen). It can only be used as a last step in a program.

Parameter	Description
Speed	Numerical value for rotation speed; in rpm.
Speed Ramp Type	List of options where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft, Manual]
Pulse Energy - Pe	Pulse Energy is used to control the amount of energy/current in each pulse. Pulse Energy must range from 10% through 100 %. Default value: 100%.
Auto Speed	On: The tool will run at impulse energy speed both when pulsing and not pulsing. The pulse energy speed will be used through the whole step. Off: The tool will run at the entered speed when not pulsing and at impulse energy speed when pulsing. Different speeds will be used within the step.

Step Monitors

The availability of tightening steps, monitors and restrictions depends on the license installed on the controller.

The step monitors are used to verify that the tightening was achieved according to the specification, for example, angle limits or torque. Each step has mandatory step monitors and optional step monitors. The mandatory monitors are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program. The optional monitors are flexible and can be placed as needed in the multistep program. Every step can have up to eight monitors each.

The following monitors are automatically added to every step that is added to the multistep tightening program.

Default step monitors
Step Monitor	Applicable steps
Angle	All

Available tools for each system type
Power Focus 6000 / Power Focus 8	Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening / Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Flex	IxB
ST	ST	QST	IxB
STR	STR
SL	QST
QST
STB
IxB
Power Focus Connect
XB

A - Angle

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

MWR-TA

This step monitor measures the maximum angle reached during the monitor and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit.

The angle measurement starts at the start of the monitor or, if specified, at the point where the torque passes Trigger torque for the first time during the monitor.

Parameter	Description	Default value
Stop condition	It specifies where the angle measurement ends: End End point used: the angle at the end of the monitor. Peak Torque End point used: the angle at the point where the highest torque is reached during the monitor. Shut Off End point used: the angle at the shut off point of the step. Peak End point used: the highest angle reached during the monitor.	Shut Off
Trigger torque	The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Minimum limit: must be >= 0 Maximum limit: must be < Tool Max Torque	Not set
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable angle. Minimum limit: must be >= 0 Maximum limit: must be < 9 999 999 and < High Limit	Not set
High Limit	Highest acceptable angle. Minimum limit: Must be > 0 and > Low Limit Maximum limit: must be < 9 999 999	Not set

Result Values

Angle Measured: the angle measured by the monitor.

Point and click on image to see more information:

Step Monitor Angle - Stop condition End

A	Shut-off point	D	Angle high limit
B	Torque trigger	E	Measured angle
C	Angle low limit	F	Step

Point and click on image to see more information:

Step Monitor Angle - Stop condition Peak Torque

A	Peak torque	E	Angle high limit
B	Shut-off point	F	Measured angle
C	Torque trigger	G	Step
D	Angle low limit

Point and click on image to see more information:

Step Monitor Angle, Stop condition Shut Off

A	Shut-off point	D	Angle high limit
B	Torque trigger	E	Measured angle
C	Angle low limit	F	Step

Point and click on image to see more information:

Step Monitor Angle - without Torque Trigger and with stop condition Peak

A	Shut-off point	D	Measured angle
B	Angle low limit	E	Step n-1
C	Angle high limit	F	Step n

YA - Angle from Yield

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This monitor measures the peak angle reached from the yield point and checks that the peak angle is within the limit.

Parameter	Description
Gradient Angle Window	Specifies Angle Window: For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1 deg. For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20 deg. Manual: Manually set Angle Window.
Angle Window	Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.
Yield Point Percentage	Must be >= 20 %
Trigger Torque	The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.
Damping	Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable angle. Must be >= 0
High Limit	Highest acceptable angle. Must be > 0
Torque Filter Type	The type of the filter: None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation. Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples. Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter. Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.
Cut-off Frequency	Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass: 20 Hz 40 Hz 90 Hz 200 Hz 600 Hz
Number of Samples	Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average: 2 4 6 8 16 32

C - Current

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This monitor measures the actual current at any point after the torque passes Torque Trigger. The result will be the first peak or low value, that made the monitor NOK. In case of OK, the result will be the last measured current value. If the torque trigger is never reached during the monitor it will end with NOK status and no measurement value.

Parameter	Description
Torque Trigger	Must be >= 0 and < Tool Max Torque.
Low limit	Lowest acceptable current.
High limit	Highest acceptable current.

DT - Delta Torque

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This step monitor measures the difference between the peak torque and the low spot torque (i.e. the lowest measured torque) and checks that it is between the limits.

Parameter	Description
High Limit	Highest acceptable torque.
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable torque.

LST - Low Spot Torque

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This step monitor measures the lowest torque and checks that it is between the limits.

Parameter	Description
High Limit	Highest acceptable torque.
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable torque.
Type	Specifies the start condition: Step Start: The measurement starts from step start and ends at the shut-off point. Angle Trigger: The measurement starts at the set angle and ends at the shut-off point.
Start Angle	Available when Type is set to Angle Trigger.

MT - Mean Torque

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This monitor measures the average torque during the monitor and checks the calculated value is within the limits.

Parameter	Description
Type	Specifies start condition: Step Start: The measurement starts from step start and ends at the shut-off point. Torque Trigger: The measurement starts at the point where the torque passes Torque Trigger for the first time. It ends at the shut-off point. Angle Trigger: The measurement starts at the point where the angle is Angle Trigger, measured from the optional Trigger Torque, is reached. Without Trigger Torque, the Angle Trigger is measured from the start of the step. It ends at the shut-off point Angle Window: Measures during an Angle Window. The window starts at the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time plus an angle offset, Angle Trigger. Time Interval: Measures during the last Time Interval seconds of the tightening.
Torque Trigger	Available when Type is set to Trigger Torque, Angle Trigger or Angle Window. Must be >= 0 and < Tool Max Torque.
Angle Trigger	Available when Type is set to Angle Trigger or Angle Window. Must be > 0.
Angle Window	Available when Type is set to Angle Window. Must be > 0.
Time Interval	Available when Type is set to Time Interval. Must be > 0.
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable torque.
High Limit	Highest acceptable torque.

PT - Peak Torque

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

MWR-TA

MWR-T

This step monitor measures the maximum torque reached during the monitor, including any over shoot, and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit.

Parameter	Description
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable torque.
High Limit	Highest acceptable torque.

PTCA - Post Thread Cut Angle

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This step monitor measures the maximum angle reached during the monitor and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit.

The Trigger Torque level is ignored until the end of the Thread cut angle window is reached. After that, the angle measuring starts as soon as the measured torque is above Trigger Torque.

Parameter	Description	Default value
Stop condition	It specifies where the angle measurement ends: End End point used: the angle at the end of the monitor. Peak Torque End point used: the angle at the point where the highest torque was reached during the monitor. Shut Off End point used: the angle at the shut off point of the step. Peak End point used: the highest angle reached during the monitor.	Shut Off
Trigger torque	The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Minimum limit: must be >= 0 Maximum limit: must be < Tool Max Torque	0
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable angle. Minimum limit: must be >= 0 Maximum limit: must be < 9 999 999 and < High Limit	Not set
High Limit	Highest acceptable angle. Minimum limit: Must be > 0 and > Low Limit Maximum limit: must be < 9 999 999	Not set
Thread cut trigger torque	Minimum limit: must be >= 0 Maximum limit: must be < Tool Max Torque	Not set
Thread cut angle window	Minimum limit: must be >= 0 Maximum limit: must be < 9 999 999	0

Result Values

Angle Measured: the angle measured by the monitor.

Point and click on image to see more information:

Step Monitor - Post Thread Cut Angle

A	Shut-off point	E	Angle low limit
B	Torque trigger	F	Angle high limit
C	Torque trigger thread cut	G	Measured angle
D	Thread cut angle window

PTCPT - Post Thread Cut Peak Torque

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

Measures the maximum torque achieved during the monitoring, including any over-shoot, and checks that it is between the Torque limits. All torque values are ignored until the end of the Thread cut angle window has been reached.

Parameter	Description
Thread cut trigger torque	Must be >= 0
Thread cutting angle window	Must be > 0
Low Limit	Must be >= 0
High Limit	Must be > 0 Must be > Low limit

PVTH - Post View Torque High

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This monitor checks that all torque values in the Angle Window Length are below the High limit.

The Angle Window starts at the angle degrees set in Start Angle in reverse direction from the shut-off point. This then spans for the angle degrees set in Angle Window Length in reverse direction. If Start Angle is left blank, the Angle Window starts at the shut-off point. The torque values used in the monitor are based on the mean torque value, calculated over Number of Samples. If the total angle of the step is less than Start Angle plus Angle Window Length the monitor will report NOK.

Parameter	Description
Start Angle	Must be >= 0
Window length	Must be > 0
Number of samples	Minimum value =1 Maximum value = 80
High Limit	Highest acceptable torque.

PVTL - Post View Torque Low

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

Same as monitor Post View Torque High, but this monitor checks that all torque values in the Angle Window Length are above Low Limit instead.

Parameter	Description
Start Angle	Must be >= 0
Window length	Must be > 0
Number of samples	Minimum value =1 Maximum value = 80
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable torque.

PrT - Prevailing Torque

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

The monitor calculates the prevailing torque value in the Window Length and checks that it is between the Torque limits. The Angle Window starts at the angle degrees set in Start Angle in reverse direction from the shut-off point. This then spans for the angle degrees set in Angle Window Length in reverse direction. If Start Angle is left blank the angle window starts at the shut-off point. The calculated prevailing torque value is the mean or peak torque value (depending on the parameter set by the user) during the Window Length. The calculated value is saved as result data Prevailing Torque Measured. If Torque compensation is set to On, the Prevailing Torque Measured will be subtracted from all torque result values in consecutive steps. Any previously calculated prevailing torque compensation values will no longer be subtracted from torque result values. If Torque compensation is set to Off, no subtraction will be made in consecutive steps.

If the total angle of the step is less than the Start Angle plus Window Length, then the monitor will report NOK.

Prevailing torque can be measured as an average of measured values, or at peak torque. To choose between these two modes, set the Use Value parameter to either Mean torque (for average values), or Peak torque (for peak value).

Parameter	Description
Torque Compensation	On or off.
Start Angle	Must be > 0
Window length	Must be >= 0
Low Limit	Must be > 0
High Limit	Must be >= 0
Use value	Mean torque (for average values), or Peak torque (for peak value).

PC - Pulse Count

Tools
STR

This step monitor is only available for the following tools:

ETV-STR61-100-13
ETV-STR61-70-13
ETV-STR61-50-10

Before using the Pulse Count step monitor, the Low Reaction Strategies license must be installed on the controller.

This monitor measures the number of pulses and confirms if it is between the pulse count low limit and pulse count high limit.
If the torque trigger level is set, the check starts as soon as the measured torque is above the torque trigger level.

If running a tightening step with Pulse Count step monitor, use the necessary PulseDrive socket/adapter.
If the tightening step runs without the PulseDrive socket/adapter, all the tightenings are NOK. The step error “PulseDrive socket/adapter not detected” shows for no PulseDrive socket/adapter.

Parameter

Description

Pulse Count High Limit - n+

The Pulse Count limits are used to determine if the measured number of pulses is OK or NOK.
The measured number of pulses is OK if it is between the pulse count low limit and pulse count high limit.
The measured number of pulses is NOK if:

It is higher than the pulse count high limit.
It is lower than the pulse count low limit.
The trigger torque level is not reached.

Pulse count high limit must range from 1 through 9999999. It must be greater than or equal to the pulse count low limit.
Pulse Count High Limit text box can be empty.

Pulse Count Low Limit - n-

It is higher than the pulse count high limit.
It is lower than the pulse count low limit.
The trigger torque level is not reached.

Pulse Count Low Limit must range from 1 through 9999999. It must be lower than or equal to the Pulse Count High Limit.
Pulse Count Low Limit text box can be empty.

Torque Trigger - Tt

Torque Trigger must range from 0 through the maximum torque of the tool.
Torque Trigger text box can be empty.

SOT - Shut Off Torque

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

The shut off point is the point where the step reaches its target. The torque is measured at the shut off point and checked to be between High limit and Low limit.

Parameter	Description
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable torque.
High Limit	Highest acceptable torque.

SOC - Shut Off Current

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

The shut off point is the point where the step reaches its target. The current is measured at the shut off point and checked to be between High limit and Low limit .

Parameter	Description
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable current.
High Limit	Highest acceptable current.

SSD - Stick Slip Detection

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This step monitor detects and reports stick slip effects during a step. The detection is done by counting the number of times the torque falls below the Trigger Level. If the number of times is larger than Maximum Number of Oscillations then the stick slip error is reported. The monitor operates in two different modes, Dynamic or Fixed. The difference between the modes is the way that the Trigger level is calculated.

Dynamic Torque: Trigger Level is dynamically calculated as Peak Torque Percentage of the current max torque, which has been achieved so far during the monitoring. The monitoring is started as soon as the torque passes the Trigger Torque.

Fixed Torque: Trigger Level is the fixed Trigger Torque specified by the user. In this mode the percentage is not needed.

If the torque never reaches the Trigger Torque then the monitoring is not started, this will result in status NOK.

Parameter	Description
Type	Specifies what type of Stick slip detection that will be done in the monitor Stick Slip detection. Default: Dynamic torque.
Peak Torque Percentage	Default: 80%, Must be >=10 and < 100.
Trigger Torque	Default: 5, Must be >= 0 and < Tool max torque.
Maximum Number of Oscillations	Default: 5, Must be >= 3 and <20.

Ti - Time

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

Measures the elapsed time during the monitor and checks that it is between the time limits. The time measurement starts at the start of the monitor and, if the Trigger Torque is specified, at the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time during the monitor.

Parameter

Description

Trigger Torque

Must be >= 0 and < Tool max torque.

Low Limit

Must be >= 0

High Limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

TG - Torque Gradient

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This monitor checks that the gradient is within the limit.

Parameter	Description
Gradient Angle Window	Specifies Angle Window: For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1 deg. For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20 deg. Manual: Manually set Angle Window.
Angle Window	Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.
End Point Check	If set to Yes, only the gradient measured at the shut off point of the step is checked to be within the limits.
Trigger Torque	The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.
Damping	Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable torque gradient. Must be >= -100.
High Limit	Highest acceptable torque gradient. Must be > -100 and > Low limit.
Torque Filter Type	The type of the filter: None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation. Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples. Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter. Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.
Cut-off Frequency	Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass: 20 Hz 40 Hz 90 Hz 200 Hz 600 Hz
Number of Samples	Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average: 2 4 6 8 16 32
Angle Offset	Available when End Point Check is set to No. Specifies the degrees that the calculation of the gradient start after the trigger torque is passed for the first time.

TC - Torque Calibration

Tools
QST

This step monitor is only available for tools equipped with multiple transducers.

The Torque Calibration monitor checks if the maximum torque reached is within the torque limits.

Parameter

Description

Transducer type

Torque or Torque 2

Set to Torque 2 for the front transducer of the tool.

Low limit

Must be >= 0

High limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

TAW - Torque in Angle Window

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This monitor checks that all torque values in the angle window are within the torque limits.

Parameter	Description
Trigger Torque	Must be >= 0
Start Angle	Must be > 0
Window Length	Must be <= 0
Low Limit	Must be >= 0
High Limit	Must be > 0 Must be > Low limit
NOK if window is passed	If set to Yes, status of this monitor is NOK if the end of angle window is not reached.

TRD - Torque Rate and Deviation

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This step monitor measures and checks the torque rate, i.e. the ratio of torque vs. angle. The calculated torque rate is checked if it is within the torque rate limits defined by High Limit and Low Limit.

Parameter	Description
Trigger Torque	Torque of the angle start point.
Start Point Angle	When Start point angle has been measured from Trigger torque the measuring of the torque starts.
End Point Angle	Angle point where the measuring of the torque is stopped.
End Point Torque	Torque where the measuring of the torque is stopped.
Low Limit	Lowest acceptable torque.
High Limit	Highest acceptable torque.
Limit	Must be > 0

Cl - Click

Tools

MWR-T

MWR-TA

This step monitor is not available for IxB tools.

Monitor to enable click torque and click angle results. This monitor has no settings, and can only be used with the MWR step.

LD - Loosening Detection

Tools
STwrench

This step monitor is only available for STwrench tools

This monitor can be used to check the torque and direction to see if a loosening is attempted when using the Wrench Production step strategy for an STwrench. If the applied torque is above the value set for Loosening Limit in the direction opposite to the configured thread direction of the program, the result shall be reported as NOK.

Step Restrictions

The availability of tightening steps, monitors and restrictions depends on the license installed on the controller.

To make sure the tightening stops if something unexpected happens, it is possible to add step restrictions to the multistep tightening program. These restrictions could, for example, test that a maximum torque is not reached or that a part of the multistep tightening does not take too long to run. Each step has its own set of mandatory step restrictions and optional step restrictions. The mandatory restrictions are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program. All steps can have up to four restrictions each.

For synchronized tightening in Power Focus 6000 and Power Focus 8, it is possible to use synchronization points in the tightening program. When any condition that is set for a restriction is met, the tool will be stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point (only valid when using synchronized tightening in Power Focus 6000, Power Focus 8, and Flex), or the end of the program. In controllers without synchronized tightening the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program.

For Flex only:

For each restriction, select Repairable = Yes to allow retry when tightening stops.

The following restrictions are automatically added to every step that is added to the multistep tightening program.

Default step restrictions
Step Restriction	Applicable steps
Maximum Time	All except External Result and MWR
Maximum Torque	Tighten to Angle Tighten to Torque+Angle Turbo Loosening Wait Socket release Run until Digital Input Tighten to Trigger Release TensorPulse Impulse
Maximum Angle	Tighten to Torque TurboTight Turbo Loosening Tighten to DynaTork Wait Run until Digital Input Loosen to Torque Thread Cutting to Torque Rundown Tighten to Yield Pulsing Rundown Snug TensorPulse

Available tools for each system type
Power Focus 6000 / Power Focus 8	Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening / Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Flex	IxB
ST	ST	QST	IxB
STR	STR
SL	QST
QST
STB
IxB
Power Focus Connect
XB

CTh - Cross Thread

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This restriction checks the angle from the point where torque passes Start torque (T1) to the point where the torque passes End torque (T2). If the angle measured from Start torque (T1) is higher than Maximum limit (Amax), the tool is stopped immediately.

When the torque passes End torque (T2), the measured angle is checked against the limit Minimum limit (Amin). If the angle is lower than this limit, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter	Description	In illustration
Start Torque	Must be <=0.	T1
End Torque	Must be <=0.	T2
Minimum Limit	The low angle limit.	Amin
Maximum Limit	The high angle limit.	Amax

C - Current

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This step restriction is not supported for Power Focus XC.

This restriction checks the actual current where torque passes Torque Trigger. If the actual current exceeds the limits, the tool will be stopped immediately and the tightening program will jump to the next synchronization point or the end of the program. The result will be the first peak or low value, that made the monitor NOK. In case of OK, the result will be the last measured current value. If the torque trigger is never reached during the restriction it will end with status OK.

Parameter	Description
Torque Trigger	Must be >= 0 and < Tool Max Torque.
Low limit	Lowest acceptable current.
High limit	Highest acceptable current.

A - Maximum Angle

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This restriction measures the angle. If the measured angle reaches the Maximum Limit, the tool is stopped immediately. The angle is measured from the start of the restriction or, if specified, from the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time during the restriction.

Parameter	Description
Trigger Torque	If specified, this is the torque from where the angle is measured.
Maximum Limit	If this limit is reached the tool is stopped immediately.

T - Maximum Torque

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque exceeds the Maximum limit, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter	Description
Maximum Limit	If the torque reaches this specified limit the tool is stopped immediately.

Ti - Maximum Time

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This restriction checks the time. If Maximum Limit is reached, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter	Description
Maximum Limit	If this time is elapsed, the tool is stopped immediately.

Rh - Rehit

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque exceeds the Detection Torque, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point (for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening and Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening), or the end of the program.

It is only possible to add step Rehit restriction to the first step of the multistep tightening program. Once the Rehit restriction has been added to the first step it shall not be possible to move the step to any other position within the tightening program. The Rehit restriction has to be deleted from the first step in order to move it to other position in the tightening program.

Parameter	Description
Detection Torque	If the measured torque exceeds the Detection Torque, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point (for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening and Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening), or the end of the program. Must be greater than zero.
Angle Window	The angle window is measured from the start of the step. If no Angle Window is set, the restriction is active during the whole step.

RT - Rescinding Torque

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque drops below the condition of the restriction the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point (for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized Tightening and Power Focus 8 Synchronized Tightening), or the end of the program.

Torque control processes
The restriction condition is the measured torque. For the restriction to be active the torque must first exceed 110 % of the Rescinding Torque Limit.
Angle control processes
This restriction checks the maximum torque reached during the restriction. For the restriction to be active the torque must first exceed the Trigger Torque.

Torque control processes
Parameter	Description
Rescinding torque limit	Default: 10 Nm. Must be > 0.

Angle control processes (valid only for Power Focus 6000 Synchronized tightening and Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening)
Parameter	Description
Trigger Torque	Must be > 0.
Peak torque percentage	Default: 95. Must be >= 50.
Rescinding torque time	Default: 20. Must be >= 5 and <= 500.
Rescinding Torque Angle	Must be > 0.

Cable tools have the option to select Rescinding Torque for Angle. This restriction is controlled by two parameters: Peak Torque Percentage and Rescending Torque Time. Percentage sets the downward deviation from the last peak torque, and Rescending Torque Time sets the duration (between 5 and 500 ms) of that deviation. Only when both conditions (equal to or lower than the indicated percentage for the set duration) are met, will the program be interrupted and jump to the end.

TG - Torque Gradient

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This restriction checks the gradient and if it is outside the limits the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program.

Parameter	Description
Gradient Angle Window	Specifies Angle Window: For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1 deg. For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20 deg. Manual: Manually set Angle Window.
Angle Window	Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.
Trigger Torque	Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.
Damping	Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.
Minimum Limit	Must be >= -100.
Maximum Limit	Must be > -100 and > Low limit.
Torque Filter Type	The type of the filter: None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation. Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples. Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter. Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.
Cut-off Frequency	Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass: 20 Hz 40 Hz 90 Hz 200 Hz 600 Hz
Number of Samples	Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average: 2 4 6 8 16 32

TAW - Torque in Angle Window

Tools

STR

QST

STB

IXB

This restriction checks that the measured torque in the Angle Window Length is between the Torque limits. If the measured torque is outside the limits the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end. The Angle Window Length starts at the Start Angle from the point that the torque first passed the Trigger Torque. If Trigger Torque is not set, then the Start Angle begins at the start of the restriction.

If the end of the Angle Window Length is not reached, the status of the restriction is NOK.

Parameter	Description
Trigger Torque	Must be >= 0
Start Angle	Must be >= 0
Window Length	Must be >0
Minimum Limit	Must be >= 0
Maximum Limit	Must be <= Minimum limit

TCD - Torque vs Current Deviation

Tools

STR

QST

IXB

This restriction verifies that all current measurements converted to the corresponding torque are, at most, the Maximum deviation away from the actual torque measured with the torque transducer. The restriction starts when the torque reaches Trigger Torque for the first time during the step and is active until the step reaches its target.

If Trigger Torque is never reached, the monitor will report OK.

Parameter	Description
Trigger Torque	Must be >= 0
Maximum Deviation	Default: 1, Must be > 0

PCH - Pulse Count High

Tools

STR

IXB

This restriction is only available for the following tools:

ETV-STR61-100-13
ETV-STR61-70-13
ETV-STR61-50-10
ITB-P

Before using the Pulse Count restriction, the Low Reaction Strategies license must be installed on the controller.

This restriction gives a limit to the number of pulses, and makes sure that those are below the specified pulse count high limit.
If the measured number of pulses is higher than the pulse count high limit, the tool is stopped immediately and the program goes to the next synchronization point or the end of the program.
If the torque trigger level is set, the check starts as soon as the measured torque is above the torque trigger level.

If running a tightening step with Pulse Count High step restriction, use the necessary PulseDrive socket/adapter.
If the tightening step runs without the PulseDrive socket/adapter, all the tightenings are NOK. The step error “PulseDrive socket/adapter not detected” shows for no PulseDrive socket/adapter.

Parameter	Description
Pulse Count High Limit - n+	Pulse count high limit must range from 1 through 9999999. Pulse Count High Limit text box can be empty.
Torque Trigger - Tt	Torque Trigger must range from 0 through the maximum torque of the tool. Torque Trigger text box can be empty.

Result Reporters

The result reporters makes it possible to extract specific values of selected producer from the result. The result reporters belong to a step but has to be tied to the monitor/restriction which they read the values from. Only monitors or restrictions located in the same step as the result reporter can be selected. A result reporter is added to a step using drag and drop (in the same way as monitors and restrictions). Each result reporter is responsible for reporting a specific result value, for example, Rundown Angle, Final Torque, Prevailing Torque.

It is possible to tie a result reporter to:

Program monitors
Step monitors
Step restrictions

Each result reporter defines a final value type:

Final Angle
Final Torque
Prevailing Torque
Self-tap Torque
Current
Rundown Angle
Number of Pulses

General Parameters

Parameter	Description
Producer	Specifies which monitor/restriction produces the value.
Value	Specifies which value to show from the selected producer.

Limitations:

It is only possible to add a result reporter on a monitor/restriction belonging to a step in main path or a program monitor/program restriction.
There may exist several reporters on a step if they are of different type.
There may exist a result reporter of, for example, type final angle on every step and program monitor angle.
For those monitor/restrictions that have more than one result value, it is possible to add more than one result reporter if the result reporters are of different types.
There may not exist several result reporters of the same type on a step or on a program monitor/restriction.
There is only one result reported for each possible final value type.

Rules:

The internal number of a result item has to be the same as for the corresponding result reporter.
The internal number of a monitor/restriction result has to be the same as the internal number of the monitor/restriction in the configuration.
The step results has to be ordered according to the order of execution. The first executed step has to be first.

Possible values reported by a result reporter if present in the monitor/restriction/step:

The monitors/restrictions measured value (as float or integer)
The monitors/restrictions high and low limits
Status
Torque trigger and angle trigger
Angle target and torque target (read from the step)

Possible values for status:

Low
OK
High
Other
NotSet

The target values do not belong to any step monitor so the target values are taken from the step that the monitor belongs to.

Adding a Multistep Program

On the Home view, select the Tightening Tab.
Select the + icon at the upper-right corner of the interface and enter a name for the program.
Click on the Strategy selection icon and select either Multistep Tightening or Multistep Loosening, based on the requirement.

Drag and drop tightening steps, monitors and restrictions in the tightening area.

Steps can only be placed between the start and end points of the program, whilst monitors and restrictions can only be placed on steps.

Function		Description
Start and end points		Start and end points of the multistep program. All steps must be placed between these two points.
Adding a step		Drag a step from the list and drop it in the desired position between the start and end points.
Moving a step		Click and hold a step and move it to the desired position
Showing step properties		Click on the step to reveal the properties
Closing step properties		Click anywhere in the tightening area to close the properties menu
Deleting a step		Open the step properties and click Delete at the bottom of the menu
Adding a restriction/monitor		Drag a restriction/monitor from the list and drop it on the appropriate step.
Moving a restriction/monitor		Click and hold the icon (checkmark for monitor, stop sign for restriction) and drag and drop it on the appropriate step
Showing restriction/monitor properties		Click on the restriction/monitor icon to reveal the properties menu
Closing restriction/monitor properties		Click anywhere in the tightening area to close the properties menu
Deleting a restriction/monitor		Open the restriction/monitor properties and click on Delete at the bottom of the menu
Step error		When a validation error occurs in a step, that step will be marked. Note that when the step properties are opened, the parameter causing the error will also be marked.
Monitor/Restriction error		When a validation error occurs in a monitor or restriction, that monitor or restriction will be marked. Note that when the monitor/restriction properties are opened, the parameter causing the error will also be marked.
Forbidden placement		When a particular placement (of a step, monitor or restriction) is not allowed, the placeholder icon will not be shown.

Deleting a Multistep Program

On the home view, go to the Tightening tab.
Select the multistep tightening program that you want to delete from the list.
Go to the bottom of the selected program´s parameters and select Delete. A warning is displayed.
Select Yes to confirm the deletion.

Settings for a Multistep Program

General Settings

Parameter	Description
Name	A user defined name for the multistep program.
Thread Direction	Direction of the threads, either clockwise (CW) or counter clockwise (CCW).
Loosening Program	Indicate if a loosening program is available. Choose from the list of available loosening programs in the controller.
Type	Type of program, either Tightening or Loosening.
Program Start	Gives the torque level for generating a result. If left blank, the result is generated every time the tool is started; otherwise result is only generated from the set torque level.
Program End Torque	Gives the torque value that stops a multistep tightening. The signal 168 - Program End is true when, after a multistep tightening Program End Torque has reached, and Program End Timeout has elapsed. Default value for Program End Torque is Tool max torque * 0.03.
Program End Timeout	Gives the time value (in seconds) that stops a multistep tightening. The signal 168 - Program End is true when, after a multistep tightening Program End Torque has reached, and Program End Timeout has elapsed. Default value for Program End Timeout is 0 seconds.
True Angle Compensation	Turns True Angle Compensation on or off (default is Off).
NOK on Trigger Lost	NOK on trigger lost switch controls whether or not it is allowed to release the tool trigger before the target condition has been reached on the last step. The toggle can be set to On or Off. Off - Releasing the trigger before reaching the target condition in the last step causes an OK tightening as long as all other conditions has been fulfilled. On (default value) - Releasing the trigger before reaching the target condition in any step will be treated as a trigger lost and cause a NOK tightening.

Attachment Tuning

Parameter	Description
Use attachment tuning	Select whether attachment tuning should be on or off.
Gear ratio	The gear ratio value can be between 0.5 and 100.0.
Efficiency tuning	The efficiency tuning value can be between 0.5 and 1.0.
Reversed rotation direction	Setting that allows reversing the direction of rotation. Yes: Reversed No: Not reversed (default)

Program Monitor

Angle
Parameter	Description
Enabled	Turn angle monitoring On or Off for the entire program. If Active in steps and Trigger Torque are left blank, angle monitoring will start at program start.
Active in steps	Sets a range of steps this monitor is valid for: If no start step is specified, this monitor will start at program start. If no end step is specified, this monitor will stop at the last step of the program.
Type	Type of angle monitoring. Choose between: Peak Angle: the highest angle reached during the monitor Angle at Peak Torque: the angle at the point where the highest torque was reached during the monitor (Not available for STB tools) Shut Off Angle: the angle at the shut-off point of the step Angle at End: the angle at the end of the monitor, including the brake, if active.
Trigger torque	Sets the value of the trigger torque for angle monitoring. For STB tools, Trigger Torque will only activate in the tightening direction when executing a tightening program; and only in the loosening direction when executing a loosening program.
Low limit	Sets angle monitoring (program) lower limit.
High limit	Sets angle monitoring (program) higher limit.

Torque
Parameter	Description
Enabled	Turn Torque monitoring On or Off for the entire program. If Active in steps is left blank, torque monitoring will start at program start.
Active in steps	Sets a range of steps this monitor is valid for: If no start step is specified, this monitor will start at program start. If no end step is specified, this monitor will stop at the last step of the program.
Type	Type of angle monitoring: Peak Torque: the highest torque reached during the monitor. Shut Off Torque: the torque at the shut-off point of the step.
Low limit	Sets torque monitoring (program) lower limit.
High limit	Sets torque monitoring (program) higher limit.

Time
Parameter	Description
Enabled	Turn time monitoring On or Off for the entire program. This monitor checks that the time is within the specified limits.
Active in steps	Sets a range of steps this monitor is valid for: If no start step is specified, this monitor will start at program start. If no end step is specified, this monitor will stop at the last step of the program.
Trigger torque	Sets the value of the trigger torque at which this monitor shall start.
Low limit	Sets time monitoring (program) lower limit.
High limit	Sets time monitoring (program) higher limit.

Program Restrictions

Parameter	Description
Maximum Time Limit	Set amount in seconds. This restriction checks the total time for the tightening and if it exceeds the Time High limit the tool is stopped immediately. The time is measured from the start of the program.
Maximum Torque Limit	This restriction checks the torque and if the measured torque exceeds the Torque High limit the tool is stopped immediately.

Angle
Parameter	Description
Enabled	Turn angle restriction On or Off for the entire program. This restriction checks that the angle is within the specified angle limits.
Active in steps	Sets a range of steps this restriction is valid for: If no start step is specified, this restriction will start at program start. If no end step is specified, this restriction will stop at the last step of the program.
Trigger torque	Sets the value of the trigger torque at which the this restriction shall start.
High limit	Sets angle restriction (program) higher limit.

Time
Parameter	Description
Enabled	Turn time restriction On or Off for the entire program. This restriction checks that the time is within the specified time limits.
Active in steps	Sets a range of steps this restriction is valid for: If no start step is specified, this restriction will start at program start. If no end step is specified, this restriction will stop at the last step of the program.
Trigger torque	Sets the value of the trigger torque at which this restriction shall start.
High limit	Sets time restriction (program) higher limit.

Reporters

This enables the user to choose which values (from monitors/restrictions) shall be shown as final values. Click Add to choose a result reporter to be tied to a program monitor/restriction value.

Parameter	Description
Reporter	Select a result reporter.
Producer	Select which monitor/restriction produces the value.
Value	Select which value to show from the selected producer.

Residual Torque Correlation Factor

The setting is only valid for low reaction tightening steps. The following steps are supported:

TensorPulse Tighten to Torque (TPT)
TensorPulse Loosen to Torque (TPT)
Impulse Tighten to Torque (IT)
Impulse Loosen to Torque (IT)

Parameter	Description
Enabled	Select whether residual torque correlation factor should be On or Off.
Residual torque correlation factor	The value can be between 50 to 150.

Trace Configuration

The trace configuration can be done on program level or for each step. The default configuration is set on the program level and can be overridden in each step as needed.

Here, enabling this function allows the configuration to be done on program level.

Parameter	Description
Enabled	On: Enables the trace resolution configuration on program level. Off: The trace recording is done with the same resolution for the whole tightening. In this case, the trace points are evenly distributed in time over the whole tightening. For each time slot (0.25 ms) two values (the minimum and the maximum measured value) are displayed in the trace. The maximum number of samples in this format is 2000.
Sample Type	Sample Time: specifies how often samples should be stored in the trace by specifying a sample time in ms. Sample Angle: specifies how often samples should be stored in the trace by specifying a sample in deg.
Sample Time	Choose the sample time from the drop-down list (0.25 - 1000 ms)
Sample Angle	Choose the sample angle from the drop-down list (0.25 - 20 degree)

Validation

Parameter	Description
Validate against tool values	Use On if tool is known and set Max Torque and Max Speed. Use Off if tool is not known.
Tool	Drop-down for choosing the tool to validate against.
Max torque	Max torque of the tool to validate against.
Max speed	Max speed of the tool to validate against.

Relevant Information

Program End - 168

Tightening Program Configuration - General Parameters

Changes made to tightening programs in any section need to be actively applied by clicking the Apply button in the bottom right corner of the GUI. Alternatively, changes can be undone by clicking the Undo button in the same location.

When navigating away from the section where changes have been made (by using the Back, Home or Result button), the user will be presented with a warning pop-up where the changes can also be applied or undone. The user cannot proceed without applying or undoing changes.

For more information about tightening parameters, see Start Stage, Rundown Stage, Tightening Strategies, and Stop Stage.

In this Section

Name

Use the Name field to give the tightening program a name. This name will be stored with the tightening results and sent to ToolsNet (if applicable). The name can be maximum of 32 characters long.

Strategy

Strategy sets the tightening strategy to be used with the tightening program.

For more information about the available strategies and the relevant parameters, see Tightening Programs.

Attachment Tuning

Attachment tuning gives the possibility to compensate for front attachments on the tool. The compensation can be made for each tightening program.

An operator can hot swap an attachment and then select a tightening program tuned for that specific attachment.

In Tightening program settings, set Attachment tuning enabled to Yes
Click on Tightening parameters > Edit
Click on the start step.
Under Attachment tuning, set Use attachment tuning to Yes
Set the necessary parameters for Gear ratio and Efficiency tuning (see table below).

Parameters for Attachment tuning
Attachment tuning	Description	Default
Attachment gear ratio	The Attachment gear ratio is needed to compensate the angle. Minimum: 0.5 Maximum: 100 Socket rotation speed = Tool speed / gear ratio	1.0
Efficiency tuning	Attachment gear ratio combined with the Efficiency tuning is needed to compensate the torque. Minimum: 0.5 Maximum: 1.0 For example 0.9 means 10% efficiency loss.	1.0
Reversed rotation direction	Setting that allows reversing the direction of rotation. Yes: Reversed No: Not reversed	No

Working with the Batch Sequence Tab

Batch sequences are used to perform a specified number of tightenings in a specific order.

The tightening order can either follow a fixed scheme, or be left to the operator to decide in a free-order scheme. In either case, the sockets or signals can be used to communicate between the tool and the operator.

A Batch is set up to perform a specified number of consecutive tightenings using the same tightening program. Batches must have tightening program and batch size specified in order to run.
A Batch Sequence is an ordered set of batches, when the operation requires a combination of batches/tightening programs.

A batch sequence can consist of up to 99 batches, with a batch size of up to 250 tightenings. The batches in a batch sequence are carried out in the order listed, or by using a socket selector to choose which batch to run.

A batch sequence is completed (and the tool may be locked) when either:

All tightenings have been completed with an OK or NOK result.
The Sequence Abort Timer signal terminates the task. Unperformed tightenings are reported with NOK result.

In this Section

Batch Sequence Settings

The Batch Sequence menu shows the details of a single batch sequence with the following configuration items:

Name: Sequence name and index number.
Settings: Parameters for controlling the flow and order of tightenings.
Batch Configuration: Function for creating the batch sequence from individual tightening programs. A batch consists of one single tightening program that is repeated a number of times.

Batch Sequence Name
Parameter	Description
Name	The batch sequence name consists of an index number combined with optional characters. The index position cannot be changed. A new configuration is given lowest possible available index number. The index number is important when using sources and identifier numbers to be part of the task selection process.

Batch Sequence Settings
Parameter	Description	Default Value
Lock tool on Batch sequence compl.	A batch sequence is completed when the batch sequence counter is equal to the batch sequence size. On: The tool is locked and a tightening program or batch sequence must be selected to continue performing tightenings. Off: After completion, the batch sequence is ready to be repeated.	On
Free order	No: The configured batches will be executed in the order listed, provided they have been configured to perform tightenings. If socket has been specified, the system will prompt for the socket when the batch is to be performed. Yes: The configured batches can be executed in any order. The operator must indicate to the system which batch is to be executed by using a Socket selector. A batch is regarded as complete when all joints have been completed.	No
Increment on NOK	Makes it possible to increment the batch counter value even though the tightening is reported as NOK. For Max consecutive NOK to work (the maximum number of times a single bolt can be tightenened), Increment on NOK must be set to No. Setting this parameter to Yes, will allow the sequence to move on to the next tightening.	No
Max consecutive NOK	Maximum consecutive not OK (NOK) tightenings are a defined maximum allowed number of NOK consecutive tightenings in a batch. If the Max consecutive NOK number is reached, the event Too many NOK tightenings (4020) is displayed.	0
Decrement on OK loosening	Decrements the counter within the currently active batch. Completed batch cannot be decremented. Never: The setting is off. Counter is not decremented when loosening is performed in the active batch. Always: decrements the counter in the active batch when loosening, if the last tightening was OK. When last tightening is OK: decrements the counter when performing a loosening in the active batch, regardless of the previous tightening result.	Never
Sequence abort timer	On: The selected batch sequence can be aborted within a specified time limit Off: The selected batch sequence cannot be aborted.	Off
Abort time	Time in seconds.	10 s

Batch Configuration Parameters
Parameter	Description
Tightening program	The tightening program to use with the batch.
Batch size	Number of tightenings the batch will perform. Max. number of tightenings in one batch is 99. Batch size 0 will give the batch an infinite number of tightenings.
Identifier number	When using a socket selector, this is the socket position used to activate the batch.

Adding a New Batch to a Batch Sequence

Go to Batch Sequence in the home menu. The workspace displays a list of batch sequences.
Select the plus icon in the top right corner.
Issue the batch sequence with a name.
Select the relevant parameters in the settings.
Select Batch Configuration > Edit.
Select a Tightening Program for the batch.
Enter the Batch Size, that is, the number of tightenings the batch will consist of.
Enter an optional Identifier Number.

The new batch sequence will be issued the first free position in the sequence list. If there are no free slots it will be placed at the bottom of the list and assigned the lowest available index number. It is not possible to change the index number to rearrange the batch tightening order.

Deleting a Batch from a Batch Sequence

Go to Batch Sequence in the home menu. The workspace displays a list of batch sequences.
Select the Batch Sequence to be deleted.
In the bottom of the workspace, select the Delete button.

When a batch is deleted from the batch sequence, the index sequence is compressed and updated, leaving no gaps. The index number of the deleted batch sequence will be assigned automatically to the next sequence that is created.

Working with the Sources Tab

External signals used as tasks for tightenings are configured in the Sources menu. Sources are accessories or similar connected to a virtual station. Two types of source tasks are available:

Source Tightening task: used to select a single tightening program.
Source Batch task: used to select a batch sequence, that is, a series of tightening programs.

In this Section

Source Tightening

Source tightenings link a specific tightening program to an identifier number. When the identifier number is sent to the tool (either by external digital signal, or, in cases where a socket selector is used, by lifting the corresponding socket in the selector) the linked program will run over and over until a different signal is sent (or socket is picked up). There is no batch counting.

To link separate lists to the virtual station, a source task must be assigned to the virtual station. Go to Integrated Controller Tool > Virtual Station in the home menu and select Task > Change task.

Relevant Information

Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station

In this Section

Configuring a Source Tightening

Go to Sources in the home menu, and select Tightening in the left pane.
Select the plus icon in the top right.
Issue the source tightening with a Name and select the correct Selector mode (Control or Confirm, depending on what is required).
Max consecutive NOK can be set per source tightening or per individual program included in the source tightening. Set Max consecutive NOK per program parameter to Yes or No, depending on what is required:
- To set the max consecutive NOK per source tightening, set Max consecutive NOK per program to No. Set the value in the Max consecutive NOK field.
- To set the max consecutive NOK per program, set Max consecutive NOK per program to Yes. For every program in the Identifier selector configuration section, set the value in the Max NOK column.
By default, only one editable identifier number will be available when creating a new source tightening. At the bottom of the screen, select the plus icon to add more.
Give every item an identifier number.
If a socket selector is used, the identifier numbers will correspond to the positions in the socket selector, that is, identifier number 1 corresponds to socket number 1 in the socket selector.
Choose a tightening program to link to each identifier number by selecting a row and choosing from the list of tightening programs.

Source Tightening Properties

Parameter	Description
Name	The name issued to the source tightening.
Selector mode	Control: An external source selects a tightening program by requesting an identifier number. The identifier number is linked to a corresponding socket in the socket selector, and by lifting the socket the tightening program is selected. Confirm: The socket selector cannot be used as a controlling source. In this mode identifier numbers are linked to both a tightening program and a specific socket (indicated in an additional column in the list). When an identifier number is requested (by an external signal), the corresponding socket is prompted in the socket selector and the tightening program is activated when the operator lifts the socket (other sockets are disabled). If no socket is specified (that is, set to 0 in the Socket column), the tightening program is activated directly and the socket status is ignored.
Max consecutive NOK per program	On: The batch counter increments even when a tightening operation fails. Off: Set Max consecutive NOK for the tightening. The batch will only advance if a successful tightening is performed.
Max consecutive NOK	Set the number of consecutive NOK results to be allowed. If the value is set to 0, there is no check performed for NOK tightenings. When reaching max consecutive NOK, the tool locks and the sequence execution is halted.
Batch control	Select how the source tightening is to be executed. The available options are: No batch control Running the selected tightening program repeatedly. Internal batch control For each program in the Identifier selector configuration section, set the batch size to be used when that program is selected. External batch control External systems can set the batch size using either Open Protocol or Fieldbus. The batch size must be set by an external system; if not set when a program is selected, the tool will be locked. When batch control is Internal or External, source tightening can be configured to: Lock tool on batch sequence completion When enabled, the tool automatically locks upon reaching the specified batch size. Increment on NOK When enabled, the batch counter increments for both successful and failed tightenings. External: Configure how many times a source tightening should be executed by using Open protocol or an external protocol. Any configuration change clears the source tightening to start over from a clean and known state (the batch count in the batch will be reset to 0). Ongoing tightenings are able to finish before the changes take effect.
Use Joint IDs	Source tightening can be configured to attach a Joint ID to each result, enhancing traceability in data analysis software like ToolsNet. When Use Joint IDs is enabled, you can configure a Joint ID for each program in the Identifier Selector Configuration section. Empty Joint ID No Joint ID will be assigned to results from this selected program. Joint ID when not running batch The configured Joint ID will be attached to each result when the program is selected. If the program runs multiple times, it will use the same joint ID for all iterations. Joint ID when running batch Joint ID behavior varies based on its format. If the joint ID does not end with a number, the same joint ID is used for all tightenings in the batch. If the joint ID ends with a number, The number increments with each increase of the batch counter. The joint ID's ending number may not match the batch counter. Example: If the initial joint ID ends with 5, after two tightenings: The batch counter will be 2. The joint ID will end with 7.

Source Batch

Configuring a Source Batch

Go to Sources in the home menu and select Batch Sequence in the left pane.
Select the plus icon in the top right.
Issue the source batch with a Name.
Set the Abort on new identifier to Yes if scanning a new identifier string should abort the previous scan.
Select the Identifier method (Strings for text, or Number for numerical values)

If the Identifier method is set to Strings, continue with the following steps:
Set Free order to On if the strings should be able to be scanned in any order.
Identifier strings can be made up of up to four different strings. When free order is set to Off, the strings must be scanned in a specific order for the system to recognize the string.
If required, add an identifier string by selecting the plus icon in the Identifier string configuration section.
Select the Name label for the identifier string that is to be changed. In the dialog box, the following properties can be indicated per string:
- Name - the name of the string
- Length - the length of the string. See Combining Identifier Strings for more information on concatenating strings.
- Significant positions - the relevant positions in the string. See Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String for more information on significant positions.
- Saved positions - which positions are to be logged by the system. See Saved Positions for more information about Saved positions.
The ID number (1−4) in the string properties window cannot be altered, but can only be used to navigate between the different strings.
An error may occur when Free order is set to On, and the lengths of the different strings are duplicated. The scanned sequence will then not activate a tightening program. To remedy this error, set Free order to Off, or adjust the string lengths.
Select Edit in the bottom of the Identifier String Configuration field.

In the Edit window, indicate which strings (in the String contains column) that are to be linked to which batch sequence (in the Activates column). Select the plus icon at the bottom to add more strings.
Wildcards can be used when typing the "string contains". The wildcard(s) can be used at any position in the string. No batch sequence is activated in case of an ambiguous matching result.

The wildcard is a . (period)

Relevant Information

Saved Positions

Significant Positions

Significant positions are used to specify which characters in the barcode string to read when putting together the string to match with your pre-defined string. The number of significant positions must match the number of characters in the pre-defined strings.

In this Section

Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String

The positions in the barcode string are associated with a number between 1 and 1024. The first position of the string is 1 and the last is 1024.

The significant positions must be specified following the rules described in the table below.

Description	Significant positions	Valid configuration	Barcode string to match with pre-defined string
Significant positions in order	1,2,3,7,8	Ok	ABCGH
Significant positions in optional order	7,1,2,3,8	Ok	GABCH
Range of numbers	1–3,7-8	Ok	ABCGH

Combining Identifier Strings

The identifier string is used for matching a combination of up to four strings from a factory management system or up to four scanner inputs that need to be combined into one string.

The plus and minus buttons manage how many strings that are combined. The following parameters are available:

Parameters for combining identifier strings
Parameter	Description
Name	The string must be given a name.
Length	The length of the string must be known and must be entered. This is important to be able to combine the correct string identifier.
Significant positions	The comma-separated positions or ranges (separated by hyphen) in the combined string that are used for matching.
Saved positions	The comma-separated positions or ranges in the strings that will be saved in the result.

The start and end parameters in each row define the individual string positions in the combined string identifier, that is used in the next step of the matching process.

The first part in the task selection process when using an identifier string as an input, is to define which positions in the string that are to be activated:

Enter the significant positions, to define which positions in the identifier string that will be used for matching. The positions must be either comma-separated, or by range.

Saved Positions

Saved positions is a field where the user can indicate which parts of each string used in the Source Batch will be saved, and how they will be represented in the log. In this field, indicate the positions in the string that need to be saved. Positions can constitute only parts of the entire string. If the field is left empty, the entire (concatenated) string will be saved. The table below shows some examples of saved position combinations.

Saved position values are comma-separated (without spaces), and ranges are indicated using a hyphen.

Identifier string	Positions
String 1: 1234567	1-7
String 2: abcdef	8-13
String 3: GHIJKL	14-19
String 4: 890	20-22

Saved position examples
Saved positions	Saved results
(empty)	1234567abcdefGHIJKL890
1-3,9,11,15,20-22	123bdH890
8-12,1-7,19,20-21 will be changed automatically to: 1-12,19-21	1234567abcdeL89

Working with the Configurations Tab

Configurations of the tool and its accessories are made in the Configurations menu.

In this Section

Tool Configuration

The following section describes how different tool functions, such as LEDs and buttons, can be configured.

In this Section

Function Button

The function button on the tool can be configured to control up to six available input signals. The button’s three possible condition states are combined with the two possible states of the direction switch.

The function button is not available for ICB tools.

Configure the function button:

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Tool Configurations > Edit.
Select 1. Function Button > Edit.

Set the parameters as applicable:

Function Button States	Direction Switch State
Pressed	CW
Single push	CW
Double push	CW
Pressed	CCW
Single push	CCW
Double push	CCW

Each of the six input signal combinations can be assigned one of the following items:

Item
Abort sequence
Acknowledge events
Activate tool scanner
Batch decrement
Batch increment
Bypass tightening program
Master unlock
Reset batch
Reset batch sequence
Reset too many NOK
Select next identifier number
Select previous identifier number
Unlock tool on complete
Unlock tool on disable

Set the Detection Interval parameters:

Parameter	Description	Default Value
Push detection interval	For single push: the maximum push time (in milliseconds) between the button being pressed and the button being released.	300 ms
Next push interval	For double push: the maximum time (in milliseconds) between the button being released after the first push, and the button being pressed again.	300 ms

Tool LEDs

The tool LEDs have the following features:

The front LED illuminates the work area and can be used to indicate the result status for supported tools.
The blue LED is part of the tool LEDs or as part of the EHMI or RHMI for supported tools. An output signal can be connected to the blue LED.
The status LEDs consist of a red, a yellow, and a green ring or a segmented multicolor ring on specific pistol tools. Output signals can be connected to the status LEDs.
A result indicator configures how the tool LEDs are lit to indicate tightening results status and the duration of this indication in supported tools.

An output signal can be of the type event or state.

A state signal is active as long as the output signal is active.

An event signal is active during the configured time range.

Blue LED

The blue LED can be configured with an event or state output signal. The signal status would be displayed with a steady light.

To configure the blue LED

Select a signal to connect with the blue LED.
Optional: set the duration of an event signal.

The blue LED is replaced by or complemented with a blue indication on the EHMI or RHMI for specific tools types.

Result Indicator

The result indicator configures how the tool LEDs are lit to indicate tightening results status and the duration of this indication.

The configuration affects the front LED and status LED result indication on supported tools. This includes pattern and duration. If pattern is set to Off, the result indication will not be used, even if Front LED is set to On in the Tool Configuration view.

Front LED must be set to On in the Tool Configuration view to use front LED result indication on supported tools.

Front LED supports the green and red color. Patterns that use the color yellow will not display yellow on the front LED.

Result indicator signals
Signal	Description
Off	No LEDs are activated after the tightening, regardless of the result.
Green	The green light always turns on when a tightening operation is OK.
Red:high:yellow:low	If the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK); a red LED indicates that the final value is too high, or a yellow LED indicates that the value is too low. Red and yellow can be lit simultaneously (e.g. in case of too high torque, and too low angle).
Red:high(prio):yellow:low	If the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK); a red LED indicates that the final value is too high, or a yellow LED indicates that the value is too low. Red and yellow cannot be lit simultaneously. Only red is lit in case of simultaneous high and low values.
Red:NOK:yellow:low	A red LED indicates that the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK). An additional yellow LED can indicate if the value is too low.
Red:NOK	A red LED indicates that the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK). No additional LEDs are shown.

Status LEDs

The status LEDs consist of LEDs in three colors: red, yellow, and green. Each light can be steady or flashing. This offers a total of six different signals that can be connected to the status LEDs.

To configure the status LEDs

For each color and function, steady or flashing, select an output signal from the shortcut menu.
Optional: set the duration of an event signal.

Status LED signals and result indications can not simultaneously be displayed on the tool. The following conditions apply:

A LED is turned on by a configured signal only when no tightening is ongoing and when the controlling output signal is activated.
A LED is turned off when the next tightening is started, even if the configured duration hasn’t been reached for an event type signal or the controlling output signal hasn’t been deactivated for a state type signal.
A result indication on the status LEDs will be deactivated if an update, activated or deactivated, is made to a configured signal.

Duration

The duration decides for how long the result indication will be lit after the trigger is released.

Parameter

Description

To next tightening

The blue LED, the status LEDs, and the result indication are on until the next tightening is started.

Time

The blue LED is on for the configured duration after activation.

The status LEDs are on for the configured duration after activation or until the start of the next tightening.

The result indication is on for the configured duration after the trigger is released or until the start of the next tightening.

Direction Switch

The direction switch on the tool can be configured to trigger one input signal when quickly switched from clockwise (CW) to counter clockwise (CCW) and back, or vice versa.

Configure the direction switch

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Tool Configurations > Edit.
Select 3. Direction Switch > Edit
Select Input and choose an item from the list.

Buzzer

The buzzer can be configured to emit different sounds. Output signals can be mapped to each of the signals and provides an audio interface to the operator.

The buzzer is configured by assigning a sound to a signal selected from a list of available signals. A signal with a sound can be prioritized between 1 and 10 where 1 is highest priority and 10 the lowest. By default a signal and sound has the priority 5.

Up to 20 different signals can be mapped to a sound and each sound can have its own characteristic profile, with parameters described in the table below. For two simultaneous signals, the signal with the highest priority overrides the other signal.

A buzzer signal runs until termination and is not interrupted by a higher prioritized signal.

Configure the buzzer

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Tool Configurations > Edit.
Select 4. Buzzer > Edit
Select the plus icon to add a new sound configuration to the table.

Set the parameters as applicable:

Parameter	Description
Priority	10 different priority levels are available for the sounds where one (1) is the highest priority level. Default priority level is five.
Frequency (0Hz, 400Hz - 4000Hz)	Exact frequency in Hz.
Time On	Time (in ms) that the buzzer emits a sound.
Time off	Time (in ms) that the buzzer is quiet.
Repeats	Number of times the buzzer repeats the on/off sequence.
Volume	The buzzer volume, in percentage of max volume.

Vibrator

Tools equipped with a vibrator can be configured to emit vibrations for different signals.

The vibrator is configured by assigning a vibration pattern to a signal selected from a list. A vibration signal can have a priority between 1 and 10, where 1 is the highest priority and 10 the lowest. By default a signal and vibration have the priority 5.

A vibration signal runs until termination unless it is interrupted by a signal with higher priority.

Configure the vibrator

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Tool Configurations > Edit.
Select 5. Vibrator > Edit.
Select the plus icon to add a new configuration to the table.
Select None to choose a signal.

Set the parameters as applicable:

Parameter	Description
Priority	10 different priority levels are available for the vibrations where 1 is the highest priority level. Default priority level is 5.
Time On	Time (in ms) that the tool emits vibrations.
Time Off	Time (in ms) that the vibrator is quiet.
Repeats	Number of times the vibrator repeats the on/off sequence.

General Settings

Item	Description
Inactivity timeout	On: In order to save battery time there is an option to automatically turn off the tool after a certain time of inactivity. Off: The tool will not be turned off due to inactivity.
Inactivity timeout	Time in minutes. Enter a value between 1-1440 minutes.
Front LED	On: The front LED white light turns on when the tool trigger is pressed. On supported tools, the front LED result indicator (green and red light) will turn on when the tool trigger is released to indicate a result. To configure the result indication, see Tool LEDs. Off: The front LED does not turn on when the tool trigger is pressed or released.
Duration after trigger released	Sets how long the front LED white light stays lit after the tool trigger is released (in seconds). The configuration does not affect the duration for the result indication (green or red light). To configure the duration of the result indication, see Tool LEDs.
Tightening program selection	On: LED ring provides visualization of currently selected tightening program in a sequence. Off: Function deactivated.
Enable display buttons	On: All RHMI buttons are enabled. Default setting. Off: All RHMI buttons are disabled, with the exception of result and event view.

Start Condition

The way to start the tool is configurable via the Start source setting. The default value is Trigger only.

Options for Start Source
Item	Description
Trigger only	Press the tool trigger to start the tightening.
Trigger AND Push	Press the tool trigger and push the tool against the joint to start the tightening.
Safety Trigger	Two triggers (as with trigger and push) activated within 500 ms from each other to start the tightening.

Accessory Bus

Tool accessories are connected to the tool through the accessory bus.

Accessory bus configurations
Accessory Type	Description
TLS Tag	Tool Location System tag used to provide output signaling to the operator.
EHMI	A small display and buttons used to select tasks or programs according to the configuration.
Scanner	Barcode scanner.

In this Section

TLS Tag

The Tool Location System (TLS) tag is a tool accessory. The TLS tag is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus. The TLS tag is part of the Ubisense positioning system and is handled independently from the tool. In addition to the positioning, the TLS tag can be used to provide information to the operator. Selected output signals can generate different LED light combinations.

Up to 10 different output signals can be mapped to a light priority.

If there are two simultaneous signals, the signal with the highest priority takes precedence. When two signals with the same priority trigger the LED, the first signal received takes precedence.

TLS Tag Configuration Parameters
Parameter	Description
Signal	Select a signal to trigger the LED light from a shortcut menu. For a signal of the type Event, select the duration of the signal.
Color	Select a color for the LED.
Priority	10 priority levels are available for the sounds where one (1) is the highest priority level. Default priority level is five (5).

An output signal can be of type Event or of type State.

A state signal is active as long as the state is active.

An event signal is active during programmable time.

EHMI

The EHMI is a tool accessory. It is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus. It has a graphical display, and three select buttons. The display is a subset of the IxB Software web user interface, with the possibility to select tightening programs, batch sequences, and to view results from tightenings.

In the EHMI configuration it is possible to decide if the function buttons are On or Off.

EHMI Select Buttons
Parameter	Description
Enable select button	On: The select buttons have full functionality to configure settings within the visible menus. Off: The select buttons can only be used to acknowledge a necessary dialog on the EHMI.

Scanner

The Scanner is a tool accessory. It is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus.

In the scanner configuration it is possible to decide if the scanner should have pass through mode On or Off.

Multiple Transducer

Depending on the tool type and the number of transducers, it is possible to set how the torque transducers are used in a tightening. The transducers can be configured to be controlling or monitoring.

Multiple transducers
Parameter	Description
Controlling torque transducer	Set the torque transducer to use for tightening. Available settings: Auto: Torque 2 is used by default. If Torque 2 is not available for the IxB tool type, Torque is used. Torque Torque 2

Select Details to open a sub-menu with more settings.

Monitor and reporting torque
Parameter	Description
Report monitoring torque values	If set, a Final Torque value will be reported from both the controlling and the monitoring transducer, including evaluation of the status for both (OK/High/Low).
Redundancy error reporting torque	Redundancy error is reported if the Final Torque measured on the controlling transducer differ from the value measured on the monitoring transducer.
Lock the tool on redundancy error	Lock the tool if a redundancy error is detected.

Torque transducer misc settings
Parameter	Description
Require dual torque	If set, the connected tool must have dual torque transducers (that are not disabled) to be able to run a tightening.
Monitoring torque in trace	If set, the values from the monitoring torque transducer are included in the trace.

Dual torque restrictions
Parameter	Description
Enable double torque restriction	If set, the double torque transducer restriction is active.
Maximum torque difference	The limit for the double torque difference restriction.

Open End Configuration

The open end configuration function is available for tools configured with open end Gear Front Attachment (GFA). The function is used for configuring the way the GFA returns to the open position after a tightening.

Before using an open end tool, make sure that the tool head and tool body have been assembled and configured correctly. If not, the tool can run in the wrong direction and the mechanical stop in the open end head may be damaged.

Settings

Description

Automatic Positioning

On: With automatic positioning enabled the operator can continue to hold down the tool trigger after the tightening, to return to the open position automatically. If the operator releases the tool trigger before the automatic positioning is completed, the tool returns to the open position using the selected Positioning Strategy.
Off: default value.
After the tightening is performed and the trigger is released, the operator must press the tool trigger again until the full automatic positioning is completed.

Positioning Strategy

Forward: default value.
The tool runs forward to the open position (in the same direction as the tightening direction).
Reverse: the tool runs in the reverse direction to get to the open position (in the opposite direction of the tightening direction).
Reverse Torque Based: the tool returns to the open position by reversing slowly and monitoring the torque.
Forward Fast Start: the tool returns to the open position as quick as possible.

Reverse Torque Based and Forward Fast Start strategies are recommended for open end tools with swiveling front part.

Positioning Speed

Positioning Speed defines how quickly the tool returns to the open position, and is expressed as the percentage (%) of the open end tool maximum speed.

Positioning Speed can range from 5-100%. Default is set to 38%.

Configuring a Socket Selector

The Socket Selector is a socket tray with LEDs that assists the operator in selecting the correct socket for the tightening procedure, for example, a batch sequence. When using more than one tightening program, it is convenient to use a selector. When a socket is lifted, the corresponding tightening program is selected.

Several socket selectors can be connected to the virtual station.

To connect the socket selector to the virtual station, go to Integrated Controller Tool > Virtual Station > Accessories and select Choose Accessories.

To set up the socket selector, refer to the Socket Selector Product Instructions.

Configure a socket selector

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Socket selector in the left pane.
Issue the configuration with a Name.
Select Edit.
Select Add or Remove for the correct number of socket slots. Select all the slots that are to be active (indicated in blue).
Set Control to External if the socket selection is to be controlled by an external system.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cmU9pYL-kL4

Relevant Information

Choosing Accessories

Configuring an I/O Expander or an I/O Hub

To set up an I/O Expander, refer to the I/O Expander Product Instructions.

To set up an I/O Hub, refer to the I/O Hub Software User Guide.

Configure the I/O Signals

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select I/O Expander in the left pane. Select Edit.
Two lists are displayed, one for Inputs and one for Outputs.
- To set a channel to an input, select the required channel in the Inputs list. Choose signal type in the appearing list.
- To set a channel to an output, select the required channel in the Outputs list. Choose signal type in the appearing list.

The I/O Hub has 8 channels compared to the I/O Expander which has 16. When configuring an I/O Hub, make sure that no channel is set to both an input and an output signal at the same time. One of the corresponding input and output channels must be configured to None. Select None in the appearing dialog box. Close the appearing list of items without selecting anything.

Configuring a Stacklight

The stacklight can be configured to display the I/O signals from the tool.

The stacklight can be customized as follows:

A stack of four lights. One optional light can be added to this stack. You can also customize the order and the color of lights.
Two positions, A and B, which can be customized with indicator lamps or switches.
A buzzer placed on the side of the box that has a fixed frequency of 3000 Hz. The buzzer can be configured to activate on any tightening tool signal.
Two external outputs, two external inputs and a connector for external power.

To set up the Stacklight, refer to the CAN converter Product Instructions.

Configure a Stacklight

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Stacklight. Select Edit.
For each stacklight position, select lamp color, signal type and duration.
For position A-B, select the type of lamp, button or switch and select the signal type.
Configure the buzzer and external digital inputs and outputs if needed.

Configuring an Operator Panel

The operator panel provides a configurable digital communication link between an operator and the tool. Lamps, buttons, buzzer, and switches are used in the communication. Read the operator panel documentation for address configuration and specifications of connections.

To set up the Operator Panel, refer to the CAN converter Product Instructions.

Configure an Operator Panel

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Operator Panel. Select Edit.
For each Operator Panel position, select the defined type of lamp, button or switch. Depending on the selection one or more settings will appear.

General Virtual Station

In General Virtual Station, different specific result reporting and tightening settings can be saved. Different filters can be created to present specific results. In the tightening settings, characteristics like the tool unlocking behavior can be set. The configuration can then be assigned to virtual stations.

Go to Configurations in the home menu and select General Virtual Station in the left pane.
Give the configuration a name and select Edit.
In the Result filter for reporting field, set the switch to On for those parameters that are to be included in the results. By default, all parameters are set to On.

The following parameters can be set in the Result filter for reporting field:
- Loosening
- Batch increment
- Batch decrement
- Reset batch
- Bypass tightening program
- Abort sequence
- Abort not started sequence
- Reset batch sequence
In the Tightening Settings window, set a value for any of the parameters listed. By default, all parameters are set to Off.
The following parameters can be set in the Tightening Settings section:
- Unlock tool on loosening: ensures that the tool is locked after an NOK tightening.
- Disable loosening: ensures that the operator does not loosen a bolt when it is not allowed.
- Disable tightening: ensures that the operator does not tighten a bolt when it is not allowed.
- Maximum consecutive loosenings: ensures that the operator cannot do more than the configured number of loosenings before the tool locks.

Unlock tool on loosening settings

Setting	Description
Off	A disabled tool stays disabled regardless of the loosening status.
On OK	A disabled tool is unlocked after an OK loosening has been done.
Always	A disabled tool is unlocked as soon as a loosening has been done, regardless of the loosening status.

Disable loosening settings

To ensure that a bolt cannot be loosened by mistake, use the disable loosening function. There are six disable loosening settings:

Settings	Description
Off	Loosening is always enabled. It is always possible to loosen a bolt.
On OK tightening	Loosening is disabled after an OK tightening. It is not possible to loosen a correct tightened bolt.
On NOK tightening	Loosening is disabled after an NOK tightening. It is not possible to loosen a not correct tightened bolt.
Always	Loosening is always disabled. It is not possible to loosen a bolt.
After every operation	Loosening is disabled after any operation, including tightening OK/NOK, loosening OK/NOK and if the tool is doing a free run (no result)
After rehit	Loosening is disabled after a Rehit tightening.
After rehit, last tightening OK	Loosening is disabled after a Rehit tightening, but only if the previous tightening was OK.

These settings are valid during the execution of a task. Loosening enables and disables depending on the setting and the status of the last tightening. For a new task the start state for disable loosening is set as follows:

Settings	Start state for new task
Off	Loosening enabled. It is possible to loosen a bolt.
On OK Tightening	Loosening disabled. It is not possible to loosen a bolt.
On NOK Tightening	Loosening disabled. It is not possible to loosen a bolt.
Always	Loosening disabled. It is not possible to loosen a bolt.
After every operation	Loosening disabled. It is not possible to loosen a bolt
After rehit	Loosening disabled. It is not possible to loosen a bolt.
After rehit, last tightening OK	Loosening disabled. It is not possible to loosen a bolt.

The start state applies whenever a new task is assigned to a Virtual station or when a task starts again. The start state can differ depending on the type of task, described as follows.

Batch Sequence

During a batch sequence the enable or disable of loosening follows the disable loosening setting and is set to the status of the last tightening. This also applies when a batch goes to the next one within a batch sequence. If a batch sequence starts again, the loosening is enabled or disabled according to the start state for a new task.

Source Batch

Enable and disable of loosening follow the same procedure as described in Batch sequence. If an ongoing source batch starts again or if a new one is selected, the loosening is enabled or disabled according to the start state for new task.

Source Tightening (No batch control)

During a batch, enable and disable is set according to the status of the last tightening. If another program is selected, enable and disable is set according to the start state for new task. If any change of program, tool or socket is done, enable and disable is set according to the start state for new task.

Disable tightening settings

To make sure that an operator does not tighten a bolt by mistake there is a function called disable tightening. There are six disable tightening settings:

Settings	Description
Off	Tightening is always enabled. It is always possible to tighten a bolt.
On NOK tightening	Tightening is disabled after an NOK tightening. It is not possible to tighten a not correct tightened bolt until tool is unlocked.
On OK tightening	Tightening is disabled after an OK tightening. It is not possible to tighten a correct tightened bolt until tool is unlocked.
After every tightening	Tightening is always disabled after every tightening and must be unlocked by signal or loosening to enable tool for next tightening.
After every operation	Tightening is disabled after any operation, including tightening OK/NOK, loosening OK/NOK and if the tool is doing a free run (no result). It must be unlocked by signal or loosening to enable the tool for the next tightening.
After rehit	Tightening is disabled after a Rehit tightening.
After rehit, last tightening OK	Tightening is disabled after a Rehit tightening, but only if the previous tightening was OK.

These settings are valid during the execution of a task. Tightening enables and disables depending on the setting and the status of the last tightening. For a new task the start state for disable tightening is set as follows:

Settings	Start state for new task
Off	Tightening enabled
On OK Tightening	Tightening enabled
On NOK Tightening	Tightening enabled
After every tightening	Tightening disabled
After every operation	Tightening disabled
After rehit	Tightening enabled
After rehit, last tightening OK	Tightening enabled

The start state applies whenever a new task is assigned to a Virtual station or when the task starts again. The start state can differ depending on the type of task, as described in the Disable Loosening settings section.

When using tightening settings with STB, SRB, and TBP in radio shadow, there are some limitations:

The disable loosening setting, After every operation, only works when the tool is connected to the controller. In radio shadow, the behavior defaults to On OK tightening.
The disable tightening setting, After every operation, only works when the tool is connected to the controller. In radio shadow, the behavior defaults to After every tightening.
The disable tightening setting, After rehit and After Rehit, last tightening OK, only works when the tool is connected to the controller. In radio shadow, the tool will not lock.
The maximum consecutive loosenings setting only works when the tool is connected to the controller. The counter will not work, and the tool will not lock while in radio shadow.

Maximum consecutive loosenings settings

To ensure the operator does not loosen the bolt more than the allowed number of times, configure the tool to lock after reaching the maximum consecutive loosenings. You can set this value between 0 and 250.

If set to 0, the operator can loosen the bolt an infinite number of times, and the tool will never lock.
If set to a number greater than 0, the tool will count each loosening. Once it reaches the configured number, it will lock and prevent further loosenings.

The consecutive loosening counter resets with each tightening attempt, whether successful (OK) or unsuccessful (NOK).

When the tool locks, it cannot perform loosenings but can still perform tightenings. If an attempt is made to loosen, event 4021 – Too many consecutive loosenings will show. The Max consecutive loosening reached – 245 signal will also activate and can be sent to external systems via Fieldbus or shown on a stack light.

To unlock and reset the counter, an external system must trigger the signal Reset too many loosenings – 10151 via Fieldbus or an accessory. The Master unlock – 10005 signal can also unlock the tool for loosening but will not reset the counter. A tightening performed while loosening is locked will unlock the tool for further loosenings and reset the counter.

Allowing a disabled tool to unlock after loosening

In the Tightening Settings for the assigned Virtual station and connected tool, set the Unlock tool on loosening to On OK or Always.

To enable the settings above, the following conditions need to be met:

The Disable loosening parameter cannot be set to Off or Always.
The Disable loosening parameter cannot be set to the same value as the Disable tightening.
The tightening program used must have loosening enabled.

When the tool is locked for either tightening or loosening due to a disable state, it can be unlocked with one of the following input signals:

Master Unlock - 10005
Unlock Tool on Disable - 10059
Unlock tightening on disable - 10149
Unlock loosening on disable - 10150

It is not possible to unlock a disabled tool with the input signals ifLock tool on loosening is set to Always.

Assigning a configuration to a virtual station

Each virtual station can have its own configuration and multiple virtual stations can share the same configuration. A configuration needs to be assigned to a virtual station to become active.

On the home view, select the Virtual Station tab. Select the Virtual Station you want to assign a configuration to on the left pane.
In the right menu scroll down to General, the first configuration is selected by default. Select the ellipsis icon next to the configuration name.
In the pop-up window, select a configuration from the list. The pop-up window closes upon selection.
To finalize the assignment, select APPLY or UNDO to the right.

Configuring Live Result Presentation Settings

The Live Result Presentation Settings window allows a user to show the final torque without the PrT compensation value included, and PrT compensation value on the Live results.

Configure the Live Result Presentation Settings Window

On the Home view, select the Configurations tab. Then, on the left, select General Virtual Station.
In the wanted Configuration window, select Edit.
The Edit Configuration screen appears.
In the Live Result Presentation Settings window, set the relevant switches to ON or OFF depending on the wanted results.

If the Show PrT Compensation Value switch is set to ON, the Live Results window displays the PrT compensation value.

If the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation switch is set to ON, the Live Results window displays the final torque with the PrT compensation included.
Setting the switches to ON or OFF in the Live Results Presentations Settings window does not change the result unless the program includes one of the following:
- A Tightening step with a Prevailing Torque step monitor and the Compensation switch set to ON.
- A Wrench Production step that uses the PVT compensate with snug strategy
  
  and has Torque Compensation set to ON.

Live Result Presentation Settings

Here are the different configuration options in the Live Results Presentations Settings window.

Show PrT Compensation Value: ON

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON

Show PrT Compensation Value: ON

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF

Show PrT Compensation Value: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON

Show PrT Compensation Value: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF

Point and click on image to see more information:

In this Section

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON / Show PrT Compensation Value: ON

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON

The Live Result window shows the Final Torque with the PrT compensation value included.

If the EHMI and ST Selector are on and configured, they show the Final Torque with the PrT compensation value included.

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON

The Live Result window shows the PrT compensation value with the related compensation icon ().

If there are several compensation values, the compensation value applied to the latest available step appears.

Configuring the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation and Show PrT Compensation Value switches does not impact:

The final torque values sent to ToolsNet and ToolsTalk: the final torque values with PrT compensation are always sent to ToolsNet and ToolsTalk.
The final torque value displayed with the historical results.
The traces based on live and historical results.
The values in Open Protocol messages.
The signals.
The protocol adapters.

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF / Show PrT Compensation Value: ON

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF

The Live Result window shows the Final Torque without the PrT compensation value included. Since the Final Torque does not include the PrT compensation value, it shows in italic.

Show PrT Compensation Value: ON

The Live Result window shows the PrT compensation value with the related compensation icon ().

If there are several compensation values, the compensation value applied to the latest available step appears.

Configuring the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation and Show PrT Compensation Value switches does not impact:

The final torque values sent to ToolsNet and ToolsTalk: the final torque values with PrT compensation are always sent to ToolsNet and ToolsTalk.
The final torque value displayed with the historical results.
The traces based on live and historical results.
The values in Open Protocol messages.
The signals.
The protocol adapters.

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF / Show PrT Compensation Value: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF

The Live Result window shows the Final Torque without the PrT compensation value included. Since the Final Torque does not include the PrT compensation value, it shows in italic.

Show PrT Compensation Value: OFF

The Live Result window does not display the PrT compensation value and the related compensation icon ().

Configuring the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation and Show PrT Compensation Value switches does not impact:

The final torque values sent to ToolsNet and ToolsTalk: the final torque values with PrT compensation are always sent to ToolsNet and ToolsTalk.
The final torque value displayed with the historical results.
The traces based on live and historical results.
The values in Open Protocol messages.
The signals.
The protocol adapters.

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON / Show PrT Compensation Value: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON

The Live Result window shows the Final Torque with the PrT compensation value included.

If the EHMI and ST Selector are on and configured, they show the Final Torque with the PrT compensation value included.

Show PrT Compensation Value: OFF

The Live Result window does not display the PrT compensation value and the related compensation icon ().

Configuring the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation and Show PrT Compensation Value switches does not impact:

The final torque values sent to ToolsNet and ToolsTalk: the final torque values with PrT compensation are always sent to ToolsNet and ToolsTalk.
The final torque value displayed with the historical results.
The traces based on live and historical results.
The values in Open Protocol messages.
The signals.
The protocol adapters.

Configuring the storage of Final Torque and Trace

The switch Store with PrT compensation is by default set to ON which means that the final torque and trace are stored with the PrT compensation value.
Show Final Torque with PrT compensation in the Live Result Presentation Settings determines what is shown in Live result.

Changing the Store with PrT compensation setting

On the home view, select Configurations.
Scroll down and select General Virtual Station on the left pane.
In the Configuration window, select a Configuration and then Edit. The Edit configuration window appears.
Scroll down to Storage of Final torque and Trace, set the switch Store with PrT compensation into the wanted position.

Working with the Integrated Controller Tool Tab

Virtual Station

A virtual station is a software abstraction of a controller. The IxB tool has an integrated controller with one connected virtual station. Various configurations can be assigned to the virtual station as needed. It is possible to select a task, assign accessory configurations, and set communication protocol parameters.

The selected task can either be running a tightening program, running a batch sequence or enabling the task using a source configured in the Sources menu. The task can be monitored and the result of the task can be presented together with any events that may have occurred during the operation.

In this Section

Changing a License Type

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane.
Select the Virtual station type in the License field.
Select a new type from the list.
If applicable, select Features>Edit, to add licenses for individual features.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HanD0wI-w9k

Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane. Select Choose task or Change task in the Task menu.
Select one of the following tabs :
- Tightening program: Displays a list of tightening programs available in the tool.
- Batch: Displays a list of batch sequences available in the tool.
- Sources: Displays a list of source tasks available in the tool.
Select a task from the list.

The task name is updated in the Task field.

The task selection using sources and identifier numbers/identifier strings, is described in detail in the Sources section.

Relevant Information

Working with the Sources Tab

Configuring Manual Mode in the Virtual Station

Manual mode for the virtual station is used to perform tasks while the tool is in locked mode. In cases where the tool is locked for a certain reason (e.g. because the tool is outside its TLS footprint) there still may be a need to perform certain tasks with the tool, such as performing emergency work. By configuring manual mode for the virtual station, users can determine what signals are sent when entering manual mode (Entering signals), what task can be performed while in manual mode (Secondary task), and what signals are sent when leaving manual mode (Leaving signals).

Since desired scenarios can vary between different users (i.e. which signals to send upon entry and exit and what task to perform), manual mode is fully configurable for each virtual station.

Configuration consists of three elements: entering signals, leaving signals and secondary task (note that by primary task is meant the (automatic) task that is assigned to the virtual station under Task).

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane. Select Set manual mode in the Task field.
Select Choose task or Change task in the Secondary Task field. This determines which task that is to be run when in manual mode.
If no secondary task is set, the primary task will be used during manual mode.
All task types (tightening, batch sequence, source) can be set for the secondary task as for the primary task.
Set the entering signals to be sent by selecting the plus icon at the bottom of the Entering section.
Set the leaving signals to be sent by selecting the plus icon at the bottom of the Leaving section. See the parameters for leaving signals below.

There is a limit of 99 signals that can be set for entering and leaving.

In this Section

Entering and Leaving Signals

Entering and Leaving Signals

The parameters for entering and leaving signals are the same.

There are two types of signals: Boolean and integer/string type. For Boolean type signals, an on/off (true/false) switch is used. For integer/string type signals, a text field is used where the (I/O) signal or string can be indicated.

Signal	Type	Default value
Abort sequence	Boolean	Off
Acknowledge events	Boolean	Off
Activate tool scanner	Boolean	Off
Clear results	Boolean	Off
Disable Open Protocol Commands	Boolean	Off
External monitored [1-8]	Boolean	Off
Flash Tool Green Led (external protocol)	Boolean	Off
Reset all identifiers	Boolean	Off
Reset batch	Boolean	Off
Reset batch sequence	Boolean	Off
Reset bistable relay	Boolean	Off
Reset latest identifier	Boolean	Off
Reset Too Many NOK	Boolean	Off
Set bistable relay	Boolean	Off
Unlock tool on complete	Boolean	Off
Unlock tool on disable	Boolean	Off

Open Protocol

Under Protocols, in the Virtual Station menu, there is a list of available communication protocols depending on the current license in use. The Open Protocol is available for all licenses.

To gain access to functionality through Open Protocol, a unique port must be defined for the virtual station.

To define the port for Open Protocol:

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane.
Set the Open Protocol switch to On.
Enter the Server port number.
Enter the Communication timeout value in seconds, between 15 and 60.
Enter the PLC Index value.
PLC Index is used to map where in the shared memory the Open Protocol commands are to be written. The default value is 1 but it is possible to enter values 1 to 6.
Choose the action to be applied when the connection to the client is lost.

The Disconnect setting controls the action applied when a connection error occurs:
- None - The tightening program continues normally.
- Lock tool active high - The tool is locked after finishing the current tightening normally.
- Unassign task - The tightening is aborted after finishing the ongoing task. Except for plain tightening programs or Batch sequences where the task will be removed after finishing.
- Always lock tool - The tool is locked after finishing the current tightening, regardless of result.
Set Use legacy counter to Yes or No, depending on what is required.

By setting the counter to Yes, the legacy counter counts all tightenings in a sequence and outputs that number to secondary systems.
Set MID0015 Echo selected identifier number to Yes or No, depending on what is required.

By setting the counter to Yes, the controller responds the selected identifier number value in MID0015 PSET_SELECTED. Otherwise, the actual tightening program id is sent.
Select the MID2500 loosening program and select a MID2500 loosening program from the list.
Select Apply.

ILM Protocol

ILM Protocol enables communication between an ILM system and the controller.

For more information, refer to the ILM Protocol User Guide.

Choosing Accessories

Adding accessories to the virtual station

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane.
Select Choose accessories in the Accessories field.
Choose the accessory to be connected: Socket Selector, Stacklight, Operator panel, Scanner, I/O Expander or I/O Hub.
In the Configuration column (left), select the configuration to be used with the accessory .
In the Connected Accessories column (right), select the accessory to use.

Removing accessories from the virtual station

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane.
Select Choose accessories in the Accessories field.
In the Assigned Accessories list, select the minus icon next to the accessory to be removed.

Tool

Viewing Tool Information

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool in the left pane.

Expand the Tool Information field to view the following information:

Information	Description
Model	Tool model denomination.
Max speed	The maximum output speed of the tool (rpm).
Gear ratio	The ratio of the angular velocity of the input gear to the angular velocity of the output gear.
Serial number	The serial number of the tool may be needed when for the correct spare parts list or service instructions.
Max torque	The maximum torque the tool can use for a tightening.
Product number	The product number of the tool.
Production date	The manufacturing date of the tool.

Front End Information

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool. Information about the front end attachment type can be viewed under Front End Information.

Before using the Gear Front Attachment (GFA) - whether Open End or Closed End - ensure that the tool head and tool body are properly assembled and configured. Failure to do so may result in damage to the mechanical stop in the head, especially for the Open End type, if the tool operates in the wrong direction.
To configure the front end attachment, the tool must to be unlocked in TTS2 with a service license.

If the front end attachment is of type Open End, the following information can be viewed.
Information	Description
Reversed rotation direction	Indicate the rotation direction. Yes: Reversed No: Not reversed (default)
Tightening direction	CW: Default Tightening direction set to clockwise. CCW Tightening direction set to counterclockwise.
Positioning limit	Manual Set Torque positioning limit. Auto: Default Torque positioning limit automatically set to 2% of maximum torque but at least 2 Nm.

Perform Open End tuning

The Open End tuning function is available for tools configured with Open End Gear Front Attachment (GFA). The function calculates the true gear ratio of both the tool and the extension combined, and saves it to the tool. The tuning will take approximately two minutes to perform.

When the Open End tuning is completed the tool must be calibrated with the Open End extension attached.

Select Perform and then press the trigger on the tool.
Follow the instructions on the screen and keep pressing the tool trigger until the Open End tuning is completed.
- If the Open End tuning was successful an OK event will be displayed.
- If the Open End tuning was not successful, or the tool trigger was released before the tuning was finished, an NOK event will be displayed.

Health

The Health view shows information about the tool temperature.

The tool temperature is monitored continuously. Supported temperature units are degrees Celsius (°C) and degrees Fahrenheit (°F), with °C as the default unit. When a critical component temperature exceeds max temperature, the tool is locked and an alert (2014) is shown. The tool is once again unlocked when the critical component temperature drops below the temperature limit.

Monitoring the tool temperature

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool in the left pane. The temperatures of the various components are listed under Health.
Select the Peak Temperature view to see the list of the highest temperature peaks for the selected component.
Select the Real time temperature view to continuously monitor the temperature of the selected component.

Real time temperature

It is possible to monitor the real time temperature continuously for a component. In the real time temperature view, there are temperature statuses (Normal or Overheated), live temperature, and graphical view to show the history temperature during the monitoring. The overheat limit and hysteresis limit are shown on the graph view for reference. When a component is overheated, it returns to normal state only when the temperature drops below the Hysteresis Limit.

The historical data points can be clicked on to see a more detailed view of the individual data point. The graph stores some historical data in the window that is loaded when a graph is opened. It is also possible to open multiple graphs at the same time by opening multiple windows.

Peak Temperature

The tool tracks the temperature of each component. When a component overheats, its peak temperature is stored on the tool. The ten highest daily peak temperatures and timestamp for each component can be viewed in the web interface. Additionally, the number of times a component has overheated and it current temperature is also displayed. When exporting controller data, a CSV file is created with all the stored peak temperatures of the tool. This file is not password protected.

Using a service license, the historical peak temperature data can be reset in the tool's Services view. Resetting the data removes all stored peaks and overheat alarm counts. The data is stored on the tool memory, not the memory card. Changing or removing the memory card does not move or alter the temperature peak data. The peak temperature data should be reset whenever any service is done on the tool.

Maintenance

The tool stores a service interval number and counts how many tightenings that can be performed before a tool maintenance or service is needed.

Parameter	Description
Last service	Date and time when last service was performed. The Last service date is set at the repair workshop. The Last service date is set to current date and time when the Reset service counter button is pressed.
Total tightenings at service	Total number of tightenings performed by the tool since last service was performed. This value is made available at service, and will remain the same until next service.
Remaining tightenings	Total number of tightenings left until the service interval is reached.
Total number of tightenings	Indicates the total lifetime tightenings of the tool.
Number of services	The number of times the tool was serviced.
Tightening service indicator	Indicates the percentage of depleted service interval.
Service interval	Number of tightenings to be performed between two service events. Can be set in multiples of 10 000.
Total pulses at service	[Pulse tools only] Total number of pulses performed by the tool since it was used for the first time. This value is made available at service, and will remain the same until next service.
Remaining pulses	[Pulse tools only] Total number of pulses left until the service interval is reached.
Total number of pulses	[Pulse tools only] Total lifetime number of pulses.
Service interval	[Pulse tools only] Number of pulses to be performed between two service events. Can be set in multiples of 10 000.
Service data reset	Resets the Remaining tightenings counter and sets Last service date to the current date. Select Reset service counter to reset the service data.

Set a service interval

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home and select Tool in the left pane.
Expand the Maintenance field.
Set a value in the Service interval field. Select Apply to set the new value or Undo to revert to the previous value.
The Service interval number can only be set in multiples of 10 000. Any number other than multiples of 10 000 will be rounded off to the nearest multiple of 10 000.

To enable the maintenance alarm, go to Settings > Alarms > Maintenance and set the Service alarm indicator to On.

Tool Calibration

Tool calibration is used to control how well a tool corresponds to a reference transducer.

The calibration value stored in the tool memory is used to adjust the torque value given by the tool’s torque transducer so that the correct torque value is displayed in the user interface. The interface displays the date when the tool was last calibrated.

Preparing the Calibration

Make sure the tool is set up to perform tightening. Set up the tool with a torque reference transducer such as an STa6000, STpad or Joint Simulator Bench (JSB). Refer to the torque reference transducer’s user guide for set-up instructions.

Choose a tightening program with a target torque corresponding to a tightening normally used with your tool.

The calibration value to use for the tool is calculated from the torque readings from the tool and the torque reference transducer by using the equation below:

New calibration value = Old calibration value × Mean (Reference values / Power Focus values)

Calibrate the tool

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station > Tool > Calibration
Note the old calibration value found in the Calibration value: Main text box.
A tool with multiple transducers will show two calibration values, Torque and Torque 2. The Torque 2 calibration value is used for the front torque transducer.

If the calibration value is adjusted by more than 10%, a confirmation prompt is displayed as the change may significantly impact the accuracy and performance of the system.
Make at least three tightenings and use the torque values read from the tool and the reference transducer (ACTA or similar) for calculating the mean torque values.
Calculate the new calibration value using the New calibration value equation.
If applicable, type a new date in the Next calibration date field.
Store the new calibration value in the tool memory by entering the calculated value in the Calibration value: Torque or Calibration value: Torque 2 text box. Select Apply.

After calibration is completed, perform a tightening to verify that the new values are correct.

To enable the calibration alarm, go to Settings > Alarms > Calibration and set the Calibration alarm to On.

Calibration Consistency

A software update may require the updated tool to be recalibrated due to changes in the software. If the calibration consistency feature is active, the tool will trigger event number 2045 (Calibration value invalid) and prevent doing any tightening. After recalibrating the tool, it will be unlocked and tightening can be performed again.

To enable the feature, the tool must be calibrated on a software that has the calibration consistency feature (version 3.13 or above.). If a future software update has calibration values that do not match the calibration, the tool locks up as described earlier.

Upgrading directly to a software that requires recalibration without enabling the feature will not lock the tool or trigger the event.

Calibrating a Tool with STa6000 or STpad

Performing the QA Calibration through the STa6000 or STpad

Go to the Integrated Controller Tool menu and select Tool > QA Calibration.
Set the QA Calibration to On.
Select the connection type to be used (TCP or COM), and type the port number.
The default port for communication is 4561.
Start the calibration from the STa6000/STpad. The STa6000/STpad requests tool information and tightening program.
Single tightening programs cannot be used for calibration purposes. Make sure a batch program is selected.
Execute the tightening. When the calibration device detects a tightening, it requests the tightening result from the tool.
Repeat the above step until all tightenings in the batch have been executed.
Once completed, the STa6000/STpad creates a report, as well as calculate a new calibration value for the tool.
Select Store in the STa6000/STpad to send the new calibration value to the tool.

During calibration, if the tightening program is changed, or the sequence/batch is updated, the calibration is terminated.

There is no limit in the batch size used for calibration purposes. However, the STa6000 can only display two digits as batch size. Thus, the counter on the Sta6000 reads 00 for 100.

After calibration is completed, perform a tightening to verify that the new values are correct.

Motor Tuning

A motor tuning adjusts the tool’s motor control unit to optimize the performance and minimize loss.

The motor tuning will take approximately two minutes to perform and will rotate the spindle in both clockwise (CC) and counterclockwise (CCW) directions before it is finished.

For tools configured with open end Gear Front Attachment (GFA):

Remove the open end extension from the tool before performing the motor tuning.

Perform motor tuning

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool > Motor Tuning.
Select Perform and then press the trigger on the tool.
Follow the instructions on the screen and keep pressing the tool trigger until the motor tuning is done.
- If the motor tuning was successful an OK event will be displayed.
- If the motor tuning was not successful, or the tool trigger was released before the motor tuning was finished, an NOK event will be displayed.

Viewing Transducer Information

A tool can have several torque and angle transducers depending on tool type. An image shows the position of the transducers.

Select Details for more information about the torque or angle transducers. Depending on transducer type the following information can be available.

Angle transducer
Information	Description
Enabled	Indicates if the transducer is enabled.
Gear ratio	The gear ratio between the transducer and the out-going shaft of the tool.
Wind-up	The wind-up compensation factor for the angle transducer.

Torque transducer
Information	Description
Enabled	Indicates if the transducer is enabled.
Serial Number	Serial number of the transducer as a string.
Article Number	Article number of the transducer as a string.
Calibration Value	Calibration value for the transducer expressed in Nm.

Viewing Transducer Information

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool in the left pane.
Expand the Transducer Information field to view the calibration values of the Main and, if applicable, Secondary torque transducers.

Tool Diagnostics

Diagnostic tests

To find out if a tool works correctly it is possible to do a diagnostic tests of the tool. The type of test that can be run depends on which tool is connected. Three different types of tests can be run:

Automatic diagnostic test: No action is required from the user.
Manual tests with no acknowledgment: The user has to do some tasks during the test.
Manual tests with acknowledgment: The user has to monitor and give feedback on the tool´s behavior.

It is only possible to start one diagnostic test for each tool and controller at a time.

When the diagnostic test is started the session is locked for other clients. A diagnostic test session has a time out of 20 minutes. A warning is shown 5 minutes before timeout and it is then possible to extend the session or to stop it.

Diagnostic test information
Automatic diagnostic test	Manual test with no acknowledgment	Manual test with acknowledgment
Torque Transducer Shunt Check Transducer Shunt Check For Torque Transducer 2 Mainboard Status Backup Battery Status Power Module Status EHMI connected	Start Button/Trigger Reverse ring/switch or button Function Button RHMI Buttons	Speaker/Buzzer Vibrator BHMI LEDs RHMI LEDs Front Light Front Light Colors Fan Motor Tuning

Start a diagnostic test session

Go to the Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool in the left pane.
Select Diagnostic Tests in Diagnostics.
Turn on Diagnostic Tests.
Select the test you want to run.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
All tests show result with green or red indication.
The diagnostic test times out if no action is done within 5 seconds.
A diagnostic test result is shown when the test session is completed.
If you leave the diagnostic test page the result will disappear!
Some tests will show a detailed report while others will only show errors.
To export a test result; select the Export button.

In this Section

5G Diagnostics

5G Diagnostics

Refer to the 5G Diagnostics chapter in the 5G Connect User Guide.

IAM

The Intelligent Application Module (IAM) is a non-volatile storage in the form of a SD card that is located in the tool. The storage module contains all the tool programs, configurations and results. The IAM can be moved between tools, for example to quickly get a backup tool ready.

Give the tool a name

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select IAM.
Apply a Name to the tool.

Software Versions

In this Section

Software Activation

The tool can store two installed software versions. By using the Software activation, it is possible to choose which software version to use.

Make sure to keep the battery connected to the tool throughout the procedure.

Activate a software version

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Software in the left pane.
Select Stored in the Software Activation window.

The tool is automatically restarted for the activation to take effect.

Update Software Version

Make sure to keep the battery connected to the tool throughout the procedure.

Go to the Integrated Controller Tool menu and select Software in the left pane.
Go to the Software Update field and select BROWSE.
Updating the software to a newer version will transfer all configurations to the new version.
Updating the software to an older version will reset all configurations to the default state.
Browse and choose the zip file with the applicable software and follow the instructions to finish installation.
If the software package to be installed is not compatible with the tool hardware, the software update will be cancelled. A warning message will be shown, pointing out which parts of the hardware that caused the cancellation.

For information on the current tool hardware, go to Integrated Controller Tool > Hardware.

Do not power off the system during rescue image update. The system will reboot when starting the update.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-Vq6uKaKfcA

Relevant Information

Hardware

Hardware

View hardware information of the tool

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu. Select Hardware in the left pane.
Select one of the following hardware modules:
- Main Board
- Power Module
- BHMI
- EHMI Board
- EHMI Module
- RHMI Board
- RMHI Module
- Front Transducer Board
- Front Transducer Module
The following information will be shown for each hardware module:
- Serial number
- Article number
- Hardware revision
- Product name
- Production date

Exporting and Importing Configurations

The export and import functions are used to export events and tightening results for analysis in external programs, as well as allowing for transferring of tightening programs, batches, and tool configurations between tools.

The export function is used to:

Export tightening results and events for further processing.
Export log files for debug assistance from an Atlas Copco service engineer.
Export tool configuration that can be used to copy settings to another tool.

Export a configuration

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu. Select Export/Import in the left pane.
Select what to export from the tool:
- All information
- Settings and configurations
- System logs and information
- Results
When Settings and configurations is chosen no file with results or events will be exported into the archive. With this setting the export takes less time to perform.
Select EXPORT. A prompt to select where to save or retrieve the exported file is shown.

Import a configuration

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu. Select Export/Import in the left pane.
Select IMPORT. When using the import function, all settings for tightening program, batch, accessories, and tool are replaced by the settings from the import file. However, settings for network, PIN, and results and events are not imported.
Select CONTINUE in the dialog box to start the import.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MDmNjeEkp-g

In this Section

Exported Information and File Format

The exported file is a compressed file archive containing the following files:

All information

IXBExport_<Tool iam name>_<datetime>_Results.csv
IXBExport_<Tool iam name>_<datetime>_Events.csv
IXBExport_<Tool iam name>_<datetime>_ToolPeakTemperatures.csv
ExportInfo.txt
settings/settings.bin
atlas_tool_i.zip
atlas_sys_i.zip
atlas_subsystems_info.zip
atlas_plc.zip
jsonConfigurations.zip
systemInfo.json

Settings and configurations

ExportInfo.txt
settings/settings.bin
jsonConfigurations.zip

Exported information
File	Description
IXBExport__<Tool iam name>_<datetime>_Events.csv	A semicolon-separated file containing the following information: Severity: Type of event Date and time: A time stamp of when the event occurred Code: The event ID Description: A short description of the event Virtual station: Virtual station ID
IXBExport_<Tool iam name>_<datetime>_ToolPeakTemperatures.csv	A semicolon-separated file containing the following information: Tool model Tool serial number Tool component Date and time Peak temperature
IXBExport__<Tool iam name>_<datetime>_Results.csv	A semicolon-separated file containing the following information: Type of tightening: Multi tool, single tool, single tool batch, or multi tool batch. Virtual station name Unique tool identifier VIN: Vehicle Identification Number Selected identifier number Date and time: A time stamp of when the result occurred Batch sequence name: The batch sequence name Batch sequence counter: The batch number in the batch sequence Batch count: Actual tightening in the batch Bolt name Status: Tightening or loosening status OK or NOK Status additional info: A short description of the result status Tightening program/multistep name Stopping error Errors Failing step Target torque: The target torque value Final torque: The final torque value Target angle: The target angle value Final angle: The final angle value Rundown angle: The rundown angle value Residual torque correlation factor [%]: Factor to compensate for the difference between residual torque and dynamic torque when using TurboTight. Elapsed time [s] Angle low limit [deg] Torque low limit [Nm] Torque high limit [Nm] Number of pulses Current at shutoff [A] TrueAngle compensation [deg] Time to rundown complete [ms] Time to final torque [ms] target text
ExportInfo.txt	Information about the tool set-up and tool software.
settings/settings.bin	A binary file containing all tightening programs and Batch settings, Accessory configurations, and tool settings such as: Language, Torque units, Date and time, and Result appearance.
atlas_tool_i.zip	Tool logs for troubleshooting
atlas_sys_i.zip	Logfiles from IT application
atlas_subsystems_info.zip	Info about subsystem software
atlas_plc.zip	PLC configuration
jsonConfigurations.zip	Multistep Tightening and Loosening programs
systemInfo.json	Hardware overview with information about: controller components connected wireless tools virtual stations connected tools accessories
atlas_battery_log.zip	Battery logs for troubleshooting.

Depending on the language setting in the IxB Software, the exported .csv file uses different characters to separate the fields. Depending on the language setting in the computer, formatting problems may occur when opening the exported .csv file. To avoid problems, always match the language used in the tool with the language of the computer.

See the following table for language formatting details of the IxB Software:

Formats in different languages
Language	Date/time	Field delimiter	Number format
English (en_US)	MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss	,	123.456
Czech (cs_CZ)	dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss	;	123,456
German (de_DE)	dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss	;	123,456
Spanish (es_ES)	dd/MM//yyyy hh:mm:ss	;	123,456
French (fr_FR)	dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss	;	123,456
Korean (ko_KR)	yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss	,	123.456
Italian (it_IT)	dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss	;	123,456
Japanese (ja_JP)	yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss	,	123.456
Portugese (pt_BR)	dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss	;	123,456
Russian (ru_RU)	dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss	;	123,456
Swedish (sv_SE)	yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss	;	123,456
Chinese (zh_CN)	yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss	,	123.456

Automated Backup

The Automated Backup window enables or disables sFTP export.

By default, Enable sFTP export switch is set to OFF.
When turning ON Enable sFTP export switch, an export file is created 10 minutes after the last configuration change.
If Enable sFTP export switch is set to ON on system startup, an export file is automatically created within 2-3 minutes. The export file is created within 2-3 minutes to reflect changes that might have been done before the system was shutdown.

The old Backup file is deleted before the new Backup file is available.

The data in the exported file include all configurations and settings of the controller.

The sFTP users can retrieve the exported file stored in the following directory of the system: /Export/<export file name>.

A system supporting sFTP is needed.

To retrieve the file sFTP users do not need to use any password.

The username for sFTP users is as follows:

Username

autoexport

Exporting "System Logs and Information"

With this export a service technician can share the system logs and its information with Atlas Copco Service technicians, in order to facilitate troubleshooting.

The export of system logs and information does not include logs from the connected tool(s).
If you need to export for this export logs from the connected tool(s), select the necessary export method.

All data included in the export of system logs and information are stored in a file PF/IXBExport_<IAM name>_<datetime>.tar.gz, which includes the following files and directories:

atlas_sys_d.zip - Tool logs for troubleshooting
atlas_sys_i.zip - Tool logs for troubleshooting
atlas_protocol_log.zip – Log files from external protocol adapters
ExportInfo.txt - Text document containing information about the IAM and controller
licenseInformation.zip – License information and system capabilities
atlas_systeminformation.zip – Information to Atlas Copco R&D for current system health and setup
atlas_workflow_log.zip – Log files for the workflow from external protocol adapters
vsInfo.json – Hardware overview with information about virtual stations and connected tools and accessories
hwInfo.json – Hardware details with information about controller components and connected wireless tools

How to Export "System Logs and Information"

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Export/Import in the left pane.
In the Export window, open the drop-down menu and select System logs and information.
In the Export window, select Export.
At the end of the exporting process, an exporting pop-up window confirms that the export is done.
A PF/IXBExport_<IAM name>_<datetime>.tar.gz file is automatically downloaded.

Connecting to a Power Focus Controller (IxB Connect)

In order to cover applications where a physical controller is required, the IxB tool can connect to a Power Focus 6000 or a Power Focus 8.

Applications where this is required can be, for example:

when using field bus
when using wired station accessories (stack light, operator panel, and so on)
when using I/O
when a controller is needed as a physical hub and buffer

The controller and the IxB tool must have the same software version before you attempt to connect them. Otherwise, the connection will fail, and both the controller and the tool will display the error message: "Tool Software Version Mismatch".

Turn on IxB Connect mode

Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Integrated Controller in the left pane.
Set Integrated Controller to Off in order to connect the IxB tool to the external controller. Wait for the tool to restart.
After the restart the configurations stored in the tool, such as tightening programs, will be deleted.

Connect to a Power Focus Controller via Wi-Fi

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Network > Wireless Client > Edit. Connect the tool to the same wireless network as the controller.
In Wireless Client select IxB Connect and enter the IP address of the controller. Select Apply and wait for the tool to restart.
The tool will restart.
In the external controller, the IxB tool will now show up in the Tool menu.

In the Virtual Station menu of the external controller, select Tool > Change Tool in order to select the IxB tool. For further configurations in the external controller, refer to Power Focus 6000 User Guide or Power Focus 8 User Guide.

Connect to a Power Focus Controller via Bluetooth

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Network > Bluetooth > Edit.
Turn on Bluetooth and select Apply.
Go to Settings in the home menu and select IxB Connect.
Set the Connection type to Bluetooth. Select Apply and wait for the tool to restart.
The tool will restart.
On the Power Focus Controller make sure that Bluetooth is turned on. Go to the Tool menu and select +(Add), and follow the instructions.
Go to Settings in the home menu and select IxB Connect.
Select Pair. For more information, refer to Power Focus 6000 User Guide or Power Focus 8 User Guide.
A message will confirm pairing success.
In the external controller, the IxB tool will now show up in the Tool menu.

In the Virtual Station menu of the external controller, select Tool > Change Tool in order to select the IxB tool. For further configurations in the external controller, refer to Power Focus 6000 User Guide or Power Focus 8 User Guide.

Working with the Settings Tab

Network Configurations

The tool can be set up to be accessed wirelessly from a web browser on a Local Area Network (LAN), using IPv4 protocol.

There is an option to use the tool as a client or an access point for other devices.

The following network interfaces are enabled by default:

Default Network Interfaces
Name	Description
Service port	Interface for service and maintenance personnel

The following services are available on the default network interfaces:

SSH
Web server interface for system configuration
DHCP
Retrieve system export files
Retrieve protocol adapter logs
Product internal interfaces
Accessory interface

Preparations

Remove the cover of the tool's USB connection port.
Connect the tool to the USB-port of the PC.
Open a web browser and type in the address of the IxB Software user interface: 169.254.1.1.

In this Section

Configuring Channels

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Network in the left pane.
In the Channels field, choose the frequency (2.4 GHz or 5 GHz) and select Edit.
Our tools support channel selection for both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequencies, with channel widths of 22 MHz and 20 MHz, respectively.
In Wireless AP mode, only 2.4 GHz channels are available and only one channel can be selected.
Choose to enable or disable channels.

The following channels are supported for 2.4 GHz: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11.

The following channels are supported for 5 GHz: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 149, 153, 157, 161, and 165.
Roaming performance may be reduced if many channels are enabled.

Configuring a Wireless Client

Wireless Client mode and Wireless AP mode cannot be active at the same time.

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Network in the left pane.
Go to Wireless Client and select Edit.
Edit the General settings.
1. Set Enabled to On.
2. Set DHCP to On or Off, depending on the configuration.
3. If DHCP is set to Off, set the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway. Ask your local system administrator for the correct settings.
4. Enter a Network name (SSID).

Edit the Security settings.

Select Mode and choose a security mode from the list.

Edit the Security settings as applicable. The available settings depend on which mode is selected.

Security settings
Setting	Description
Mode	Disabled WPA2 Personal WPA2 Enterprise
EAP Method	PEAP LEAP TLS TTLS FAST
Security key	Set the alphanumeric password. The minimum length of the security key is 8 characters, and the maximum length is 63 characters.
Identity	Set the identity of the tool.
User name	Set the user name.
Password	Set the password.
CA-cert	Select the CA certificate with the Browse button. It can be either of PEM format or Binary (DER).
Client-cert	Select the client certificate with the Browse button. It can be either of PEM format or Binary (DER).
Private key	Select the private key with the Browse button. It can be either of PEM format or Binary (DER).
Private key password	Set the password used for the private key.
Fast PAC	Set the Protected Access Credentials (PAC).
MSCHAPv2	Set MSCHAPv2 On or Off.

Edit the Optional Settings as applicable.

Optional settings
Setting	Description
Hostname	Set a hostname for the tool.
Warn on signal strength below (dBm)	Set the signal strength at which a warning should be given. If the signal strength drops below this limit, the event 3095 WiFi Signal Strength Low will be triggered. The WiFi Signal Strength Low event is disabled by default but can be enabled in the event configuration.
Roaming threshold (dBm)	Set the roaming threshold at which the tool will scan and roam more frequently. Minimum: -90 Default: -70 Maximum: -45
Active scanning interval (s)	Set the time in seconds between scans when the signal strength is lower than the value set in Roaming threshold (dBm). The tool will scan for an access point more frequently.
Passive scanning interval (s)	Set the time in seconds between scans when the signal strength is higher than the value set in Roaming threshold (dBm).
Connect to Hidden Wi-Fi Network	If the network (SSID) is hidden, set this value to On.

Select Apply.

When using the tool in Integrated Controller Mode, the tool's blue connection LED indicator will emit a steady light when the tool has establish a wireless connection to the network.

When using the tool in IxB Connect mode, the tool's blue connection LED indicator will emit a steady light when the tool has established a connection to a virtual station.
To access the user interface wirelessly, type the IP address into a web browser.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IAhVDKSyFgY

Configuring the Tool as a Wireless Access Point

Wireless Client mode and Wireless AP mode cannot be active at the same time.

If multiple channels have been configured previously in Wireless Client mode, enabling Wireless AP mode will update the channel list to contain only the current/default channel for the Wireless AP mode.

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Network in the left pane.
In the Wireless AP field, select Edit.
Set Enabled to On.
Enter the required information, provided by the local system administrator:
- IP address
- Subnet mask
- Gateway
To distribute IP addresses, set DHCP Server to On and enter IP range start and IP range stop.
Enter a Network name (SSID).
In the Security field, select Mode and choose a security mode from the list. If WPA2 Personal is chosen, enter a Security key whose length should be at least 10 digits or more.
Select Apply.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZvNtiSB2BGU

Configuration of HTTPS

HTTPS is used to encrypt end-to-end traffic between web browsers and controllers. The use of HTTPS requires a certificate which is trusted by a web browser. The controller software will generate a self-signed Certificate Authority on first startup, which in turn is used to generate the initial certificate used for HTTPS. The self-signed Certificate Authority on the controller can be replaced with one that is signed by an external Certificate Authority to create a chain of trust.

By default, HTTP redirects to HTTPS in the browser. This can be configured in the controller settings under HTTPS with the Redirect HTTP to HTTPS toggle.

In this Section

Configuring HTTPS

Configuring HTTPS

To configure HTTPS on the controller, follow these steps:

Access the web interface of the controller. A warning message will appear from the browser due to the self-signed certificate. Select Advanced and accept the risk to continue.
Navigate to Settings and select the HTTPS tab.
In HTTPS settings, select Create CA CSR.
In the pop-up window, select Create to create a certificate signing request and then select Close when the download is complete.
Sign the certificate signing request and upload the resulting CA certificate to the controller.
Select Generate server certificate, enter the Subject Alternative Names (SAN) in the specified format, and click Generate.
After the generation is complete, a pop-up window is displayed and the session will restart automatically.

Certificates

On the Certificates tab, you can manage trusted Transport Layer Security (TLS) certificates that are signed by your local Certificate Authority (CA) or an external CA to create a chain of trust.

The controller will use the TLS certificate for HTTPS to communicate securely with ToolsNet/ToolsTalk if encryption is turned on. If the ToolsNet/ToolsTalk server requires client validation, set up the certificate at the controller side and configure ToolsNet/ToolsTalk to trust the controller's certificate.

Import certificate

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Certificates in the left pane.
Select the Plus icon at the upper-right corner of the GUI.
Select Choose File.
Browse and choose the certificate file.

Relevant Information

Configuration of HTTPS

Server Connections

The tool can be set up to communicate with servers running the following Atlas Copco software products:

ToolsTalk − used to configure one or several controllers and IxB tools
ToolsNet − used to handle result reporting
Atlas Copco License Manager

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jdW-LgTa0RQ

In this Section

Configuring the ToolsTalk Connection

Make sure the tool has an IAM name to find it in ToolsTalk.
Go to Settings in the home menu and select Server Connections in the left pane.

In the ToolsTalk field, set the following parameters:

Field	Description
On/Off	Enables/Disables communication with the ToolsTalk server
Server port	ToolsTalk server port
Server host	ToolsTalk server IP address
Encryption	Use TLS encryption for the ToolsTalk communication

Select Apply.

To view the ToolsTalk connection status, go to Reports > Results and select the button. In the appearing dialog box, select the Server connections tab.

For information on how to configure ToolsTalk, refer to the ToolsTalk 2 User Guide.

Relevant Information

Viewing Protocol Status

Configuring the ToolsNet Connection

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Server Connections in the left pane.

In the ToolsNet field, set the following parameters:

Field	Description
On/Off	Enables/Disables communication with the ToolsNet server
Server port	ToolsNet server port
Server host	ToolsNet server IP address
Encryption	Use TLS encryption for the ToolsNet communication

Select Apply.

To view the ToolsNet connection status, go to Reports > Results and select the button. In the appearing dialog box, select the Server connections tab.

For information on how to configure ToolsNet, refer to the ToolsNet 8 User Guide.

Relevant Information

Viewing Protocol Status

Configuring the License Manager Connection

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Server Connections in the left pane.

In the Atlas Copco License Manager field, set the following parameters:

Field	Description
On/Off	Enables/Disables communication with the Atlas Copco license manager server
Server port	Atlas Copco license manager server port
Server host	Atlas Copco license manager server IP address

Select APPLY.

Configuring the Remote Logging Connection

To connect a controller to a remote logging server, configure and activate the remote logging settings on the controller.

On the home view, go to the Settings tab and select Server connections on the left pane.
On the Remote Logging window, configure the following parameters:

Field	Description
On/Off	Enables/Disables communication with the remote logging server
TCP/UDP	Selects TCP or UDP protocol
Server host	Remote logging server IP address
Server port	Remote logging server port

Configure Log Levels

To configure the logs that are stored on the remote logging server:

On the home view, go to the Settings tab and select Server connections on the left pane.
On the Remote Logging window, select Configure.
On the Configure Facilities window, select the applicable checkboxes.

Category
SysLog classification
Error
Alert, Critical, Emergency, Error
Warning
Warning
Info
Informational, Notice

To restore the selection to the previous configuration, select UNDO.
Select Apply.

Preferences

Date and Time

Date and time must be set in order for events and results to get the correct time stamp for when they occurred. The time is retrieved from one of three available sources:

Manual − the date, time, and time zone are set manually.
NTP − the date and time are retrieved from an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server defined in the user interface.
ToolsNet − the date and time are retrieved from the ToolsNet server.

Set the date and time

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.

In the Date and Time field, set the following parameters:

Parameter	Description
Source	Source to retrieve the time from.
NTP Server 1	IP-address of an NTP server providing date and time for the tool.
Server 1 status	OK/No Status
NTP Server 2	IP-address of an NTP server providing date and time for the tool.
Server 2 status	OK/No Status
Date	Date entered manually if the source is set to manual.
Time	Time entered manually if the source is set to manual.
Time zone	The time zone; either the location or a standard time zone such as UTC (coordinated universal time)

Select APPLY.

Setting Language

The user interface is available in the following twelve languages:

English
Czech
German
Spanish
French
Korean
Italian
Japanese
Portuguese
Russian
Swedish
Chinese

Change the language

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.
In the Language field, select the language currently in use and choose a language from the list.

The language change will take effect immediately.

Setting the Torque Unit

Torque results are displayed in the chosen unit both after a tightening is performed and when stored in the results list.

Available torque units
Unit	Description
cNm	centinewton metre
dNm	decinewton metre
Nm	newton metre
kNm	kilonewton metre
in·lbf	inch-pound force
ft·lbf	foot-pound force
in·ozf	inch ounce-force
ft·ozf	foot ounce-force
gf·cm	gram-force centimetre
kgf·cm	kilogram-force centimetre
kgf·m	kilogram-force metre

Change the torque unit

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.
In the Torque Units field, select the unit currently in use and choose a unit from the list.

The torque unit change will take effect immediately.

Setting the Temperature Unit

Change the temperature unit

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.
In the Temperature Units field, select the unit currently in use and choose C° or F° from the list.

Setting the Startup Screen

The default screen at startup of the tool is the Home screen. It is possible to change startup screen to the Result screen. A change of startup screen in the settings requires a restart of the tool or a refresh of the user interface.

Change the startup screen

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.
In the Startup Screen field, select the startup screen currently in use and then select Home screen or Result Screen from the list.

Configuring the PIN Settings

Using a PIN code prevents unauthorized usage of the tool or accidental changes. Multiple users can be added to the tool, each with its own PIN. Note that PIN codes are not linked to tool configurations but are used mainly for logging reasons.

The PIN must be a four-digit number in the range 0000–9999. When PIN is enabled, and the configured inactivity time has been reached, the tool configuration cannot edited. A maximum of 10 users can be added to the tool.

When changes are made to the PIN, the user that made the changes is logged. This will be displayed in the column Changed by, and added to the change history.

When PIN is activated a PIN code is required when accessing the tool from the web user interface. Without the correct PIN being entered, the user interface will only be readable, but not editable.

Activate the PIN

Go to the Settings in the home menu and select PIN in the left pane. Select Configure.
Set the PIN code switch to On.
The PIN can only be activated when at least one user in the list is enabled. If no user is enabled, a warning will appear.
Fill out the Inactivity timeout (in seconds) to set when the tool will be locked in case of inactivity.
The default value for Inactivity timeout is 120 seconds. Note that this is a global setting, and cannot be set on a per user basis.

Add a new user

Go to Settings in the home menu and select PIN in the left pane. Select Configure.
Select the plus icon in the top right.
Select the Name field to edit the entry.
In the User window, enter a Name .
Enter PIN and Confirm PIN for the user. The PIN must be a four-digit number in the range 0000–9999.
The PIN in both fields (Enter PIN and Confirm PIN) must match for the changes to be applied.
Select Permissions. The list of the available configurations appears.
Select the check box at the left of the necessary configuration(s) the user can access and make changes.
After selecting the necessary configuration(s), select OK.
The User window appears.
Select all selects all the available configurations at the same time.
Select Deselect all to clear the check boxes and undo the selection.
The user can access and make changes only to the configuration(s) selected in the Permissions window, and browse the unselected configurations with read-only access. For the unselected configurations, no changes are allowed.
Select Apply.
In the list of users, select the check box to the left of the user name to enable the user.

When PIN is enabled, the tool locks automatically after the configured Inactivity timeout.

To disable a PIN/user, clear the check box to the left of the user name.

Enable or disable users

Go to Settings in the home menu and select PIN in the left pane. Select Configure.
In the Users field, select the check box to the left of the user name to enable the user.

When the PIN is enabled, the tool locks automatically after the configured Inactivity timeout.

To disable a PIN/user, clear the check box to the left of the user.

Note that PINs can also be enabled and disabled by selecting the user name and setting the Enabled switch to On or Off, respectively.

Delete a user

Go to Settings in the home menu and select PIN in the left pane. Select Configure.
In the Users field, select the red minus icon to the right of the user name.

Select the padlock icon in the top right corner.
A dialog box with a key pad appears. Enter the PIN code and select OK.
When the PIN is enabled and the screen has been unlocked, an Open Padlock icon appears in the top right corner of the user interface.

The user interface can be locked again manually, by selecting the Open Padlock icon.

Configuring Alarms

Alarms are set to control when to perform maintenance or calibration of the tool.

The tool service interval, calibration details, and other relevant information is found in the Integrated Controller Tool > Tool menu.

Set a maintenance alarm

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Alarms in the left pane.

In the Maintenance field, set the following parameters:

Parameter	Description
Service indicator alarm	On/Off: Enables/Disables an alarm for when the service interval of the tool is reached.
Tool lock after alarm	On/Off: Enables/Disables a lock of the tool when the service interval is reached.

To set a calibration alarm:

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Alarms in the left pane.
In the Calibration field, set the Calibration alarm to On/Off to enable/disable it.

Configuring Events

Each event has a default setting for whether it is to be acknowledged (ACK), logged (LOG), or displayed (DISP).

Some options cannot be changed. They are greyed out.

Configure events

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Events in the left pane.
Select Configure events.
Search for the event to be configured by typing the event code in the Search field and pressing Enter.
Tick or untick the boxes ACK., LOG. and DISP., as desired.
If applicable, add information about the event in the DETAILS field.

Configuration of the Extended Logging

The IxB Software automatically creates logs and stores them. These logs can be configured to include extended logging using log groups.

Use Extended Logging only in special cases. Avoid using Extended Logging during normal operations, as it can significantly impact performance.

In this Section

Configuring the Log Groups

Configuring the Log Groups

The default setting for a log group is off. To change the setting of a log group to on:

On the home view, go to the Settings tab and select Extended Logging on the left pane.
On the Log Groups window, set the group to ON.

Reset Log Groups

It is possible to reset all log groups to their default settings.

On the home view, go to the Settings tab and select Extended Logging on the left pane.
On the Reset Log Groups window, select Reset.
A pop-up window appears asking if you want to reset all log groups. Select YES.

Persistent Log Groups

The log groups resets to their default setting at every reboot. To prevent resetting use persistent log groups.

On the home view, go to the Settings tab and select Extended Logging on the left pane.
On the Keep Selection after Restart window, set Persistent to ON.

Performing Factory Reset and Clearing Results

The tool can be reverted back to its original factory settings.

All settings, most of the configurations (for example, front end attachment configuration will not be deleted) and historical data will be deleted when the tool is reset. Only perform a factory reset when you are completely sure that this course of action is required.

Perform a factory reset of the tool

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Reset in the left pane.
In the Factory Reset Controller field, select the Reset button.
A dialog box will appear warning that all data will be deleted. Select Yes.
The tool will perform a reboot to activate the new settings.

Clear results

Go to Settings in the home menu and select Reset in the left pane.
In the Clear Results field, select the Clear button.
A dialog box will appear warning that all results and events will be deleted. Select Yes.

The tool will perform a reboot to clear the data.

Working with Automation Rules

Automation rules are a list of rules that are stored on the controller with defined triggers and actions. These rules allow logical operations on Boolean signals available on the controller.

Rules

Every rule has a collection of triggers and actions.
A maximum of 32 rules can be added to a controller.
A rule can be set in active on or off states. Any added rule is set to active Off by default.

Overview
Setting	Description
Name	Enter a name for the rule with a maximum length of 32 ASCII characters.
Active	Off: When the rule is inactive, it does not trigger, and a license check is not performed. On:When the rule is active, it reacts to the Input/Output signal changes that are based on the configured triggers and actions. The license is validated for all the virtual stations mapped in the rule and an error message is thrown.
Edit the rule	Click Edit to configure triggers and actions in a rule.
Delete the rule	After deletion, the rule is removed from the rule list. Deleting a rule does not stop ongoing actions. To stop a rule, first, it must be deactivated.
Update the rule	Updating an active rule applies the changes and restarts the rule.
Save changes to rule	Save changes to the rule by selecting Apply.
Undo the changes to rule	Undo the changes made to the rule by selecting the Undo option.
Invalid configuration	An error message if the rule does not have a valid signal or virtual station configured for either the trigger or the action.
Create a rule	Select Automation rules on the controller home page and then select the + sign. A rule is added with empty trigger and empty action. Select the apply button to add the rule. The rule is added and disabled by default.
License the rule	To license a rule for a virtual station, go to the virtual station. In Licenses, select the features, the Automation Rule and apply the license.

In this Section

Triggers

Triggers act as input to a rule and can be either of type Signal trigger or Relay trigger. You can configure up to 10 triggers of each type per rule.

Triggers Condition

If a rule is set to active On, it starts based on the trigger condition set. The available trigger conditions are:

IF ALL: The rule starts only when all the triggers in the rule are triggered.
IF ANY: The rule starts when any of the triggers in the rule are triggered.

Relevant Information

Cease

In this Section

Signal Triggers

A signal trigger listens to signals from the system based on configured Virtual Stations. A valid Signal trigger is configured with a Virtual Station, and a Boolean Input/Output state or event signal. An event signal also requires a Cease configuration.

Settings	Descriptions
Name	Enter a name for the trigger with a maximum length of 32 ASCII characters.
Signal	When selecting a signal for a trigger, choose from a list of Boolean I/O states and event signals. The selected signal is always connected to the selected virtual station.
Virtual Station	Select a virtual station from the list of available virtual stations on the controller.
Based on the type of input signal selected, the trigger shows different options.
Selected Input/Output Boolean state signal as Signal in trigger	A Boolean state signal has a defined state when the signal is triggered and when the signal is not triggered. To configure, go to Operation and select Equals or Not Equals for the state of the signal, which is True or False. The trigger reacts only when the signal state condition is met, that is, when the value of the signal is equal to or not equal to the set state, which is true or false. For example, the trigger can be configured to react only when the tool is running, through the Tool running signal. To configure, select Tool running from the list of signals and set Operation to Equals and state to True.
Selected Input/Output Boolean event signal as Signal in trigger	A Boolean event signal has a single state when triggered and remains in that state until reset. When the event signal is selected from the signal list, a reset option needs to be set for the Event Input/Output signal. Reset options can be selected from Cease. The available reset options are: Time, Next Tightening, and Defined Signal. For example, the trigger can be configured to trigger only when the Tightening OK signal is received.

Relay Triggers

A relay trigger receives input from the “Relay action” of another rule. This method connects rules without using Signals in the system. To configure a valid relay trigger, assign it to a rule and specify the rule’s Relay action.

Setting	Description
Name	Enter a name for the trigger with a maximum length of 32 ASCII characters.
Rule	Select a rule that has a configured Relay action. Only rules with Relay actions are shown in the list. Before you add a Relay trigger, create a Relay action in another rule.
Relay action	Select the Relay action that the trigger must listen to. The system shows only the Relay actions configured in the selected rule.

Actions

Actions are outputs from a rule. Each action can be a Signal Action or a Relay Action. You can configure up to 10 actions of each type per rule. When a rule is triggered, and the trigger condition is met, the system executes all actions. The rule continues running until all actions have stopped. An action stops according to its Cease configuration.

Relevant Information

Cease

In this Section

Signal Actions

A Signal Action sends signals to the system based on a configured Virtual Station. A valid Signal Action includes a Virtual Station, a Boolean input/output state or event signal, and a state to send when triggered. You must also configure a Cease setting to define how the Signal Action stops. By default, it follows the state of the rule and the trigger condition.

Setting	Description
Name	Enter a name for the action with a maximum of 32 ASCII characters.
Signal	Select from the list of available Boolean Input/Output state or event signals in the controller. The signal is then published to the virtual station selected in the action.
Virtual station	Select from a list of available virtual stations.
Output	Use the toggle to select the output value True to be published when the trigger is triggered. The default value is False.
Selected Input/Output Boolean state / Event signal as Signal in Action	The output value is published to the signal configured in the action. The action can be reset using Cease. Available cease configuration options:Rule State, Time, To Next Tightening, and Defined Signal. The Cease configuration is set to Rule State by default.

Relevant Information

Cease

Relay Actions

A Relay Action sends its configured output value to other rules that are set to listen to it. This method shares the output and connects the rule to multiple other rules without sending a signal to a Virtual Station. A Relay Action must be created before another rule can connect to it using a Relay Trigger.

Setting	Description
Name	Enter a name for the action with a maximum length of 32 ASCII characters.
Output	Use this toggle to select the output value to be sent to the listening Relay triggers.
Cease	Configure when a Relay action must stop. All cease configurations except To Next Tightening can be configured.

Cease

Cease configuration is enabled when an Input/Output Event Boolean signal is selected for a trigger, and is always enabled for an action.

Cease Settings
Setting	Applies to	Description
Time	Trigger Action	The user can set the time (in seconds), with a minimum value greater than 0 and a maximum value less than or equal to 60.
	Trigger	The trigger ceases after the specified time.
	Action	The action ceases after the specified time.
To Next Tightening	Trigger Action	The trigger or action is reset when the Clear Results - 39 signal is published in the virtual station of the rule.
	Trigger	The trigger ceases after the signal is received.
	Action	The action ceases after the signal is received.
Defined Signal	Trigger Action	The trigger or action is reset when a user defined signal is received. Reset Virtual Station: Select from the list of available virtual stations. Reset Signal: Select the Boolean IO Signal from the system. Depending on the selected reset signal, the available scenarios are: Event signal: When the event signal is selected as the Reset Signal, then the reset happens when the event occurs. State Signal: When the state signal is selected as the Reset Signal, additional settings can be configured. To configure the state in which the reset should happen, go to Operation and select Equals or Not Equals for the state of the signal, which is True or False.
	Trigger	The trigger ceases after the reset signal is received.
	Action	The action ceases after the reset signal is received.
Rule State	Action	When the trigger condition is met, the action publishes the user configured output value.

Licensing

Each rule is licensed per virtual station. If a virtual station is not licensed for the automation rule, a configuration error message is shown when the rule is enabled. The trigger does not activate, and the action does not output the signal.

Reports and Statistics

In this section, you can learn about available reports and statistics.

Working with the Reports Tab

Working with the Reports Tab

Viewing Results

This section describes how to access tightening results from the tool, and how to read the information given in the different result views.

When a tightening is performed, the result is stored in the tool. Results can also be sent to an external system such as ToolsNet, or exported for analysis using the export function. For more information about statistical analysis, result filtering and tightening analysis using ToolsNet, refer to the ToolsNet User Guide.

Live Results and Stored Results

The live result dialog box shows results from the tool on the screen as it occurs. Tightening results are also automatically stored in the tool as soon as the tightening is finished.

Each task is displayed as one result. A single tightening can show results in a table with key parameters or as a tightening graph. A batch sequence shows all the individual tightenings in the order in which they were performed.

In this Section

Live Results View

Position	Description
1	Target torque
2	Final torque
3	Final angle
4	Target angle
5	Result status
6	An NOK tightening will give a detailed status of the unsuccessful tightening.
7	Active batch
8	Batch sequence name
9	Total number of batches in the sequence
10	Result of each completed batch in the sequence: An ongoing batch is colored white An OK batch is colored gray, with the number boxed. A NOK batch is colored red, with the number boxed and crossed out.
11	Number of active tightenings in the batch
12	Tightening program name
13	Total number of tightenings in the batch
14	Number of completed tightenings in the batch: An OK tightening is colored gray, with the number circled. A NOK tightening is colored red, with the number circled and crossed out.

Product Essentials Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4QHUZd_74cI

Stored Results View

The tool stores the result for every tightening or loosening performed.

View stored results

Go to Reports in the home menu and select Results in the left pane.
Select View all results. The result list will show information about:
- Date: date and time of the tightening performed.
- Tightening Program: Tightening Program column shows Multistep Tightening Program name, or Batch Sequence name followed by the Tightening Program name within the Batch Sequence.
- Result: Torque / Angle result.
- Limits: Limits column shows only when the user sets Step Monitor or Step Restriction (Step level), or Program Monitor or Program Restrictions (Multistep Program level).
  
  Step Monitors, Step Restrictions, Program Monitors and Program Restrictions are applicable for Final Torque and Final Angle.
- Details: Tightening / loosening result details.
- Trace checkbox: By selecting a trace checkbox the corresponding result will be shown in the Sync Trace Result View.
Results marked with a red bar have status NOK. For descriptions of NOK results, see the NOK Result List.
Select a result in the list to enter the Trace Result View.
The Trace Result View window shows, step by step, the tightening life-cycle.
When the tightening is NOK, the Trace Result View shows which Step Monitor or Step Restriction that caused it.

On the upper-right corner of the trace graph, select the left-arrow / right-arrow to show the necessary trace graph.
The following trace graphs are available:

Torque / Time
Torque / Angle
Angle / Time
Speed / Time
Speed / Angle
Gradient / Time (when the tightening program is configured to make a gradient trace)
Gradient / Angle (when the tightening program is configured to make a gradient trace)
Current / Time
Current / Angle

On the trace graph, it is possible to zoom in/out, move the trace, and read x-axis and y-axis values on a specific point.
On the lower-left corner of the trace graph, select "+" to zoom in , "-" to zoom out, or the "square icon" to reset the zoom level back to the default view.

On the lower part of the Trace Result View window, detailed step information is shown.

In this Section

Viewing Synchronized Traces

Viewing Synchronized Traces

Synchronizing traces older than software version 3.5 is not supported.

Synchronize and compare traces

Go to Reports in the home menu and select Results in the left pane.
Select View all results.
Select the traces to compare by marking the icon of the corresponding results. A selected trace icon turns blue.
Up to 10 traces can be selected.
Results without the icon do not support synchronization.
Select the icon in the upper right hand corner, to open the sync trace view. When selecting the icon all selected result traces will be unchecked.
In the Sync Trace Result View, select the preferred Sync method from the drop-down list.

Select the trace types with the arrows in the upper right hand corner.

The Sync Trace Result View is shown below:

Point and click on image to see more information:

1	Select method to synchronize traces and display of current sync method.
2	Zoom methods to examine sections of the traces in more detail. Select "+" to zoom in , "-" to zoom out, or the "square icon" to reset the zoom level back to the default view. It is also possible to zoom to a specific section by holding down the right mouse button, moving the mouse over a section, and release the right mouse button. The area inside the drawn rectangle defines the area to show.
3	Each result is represented by one tab, showing the time when the tightening was performed. An icon on the left of each tab reflects the outcome of the tightening: Blue: Tightening successful Red: Tightening failed Exclamation mark: The trace cannot be shown in the diagram Clicking on the icon toggles between the following display settings for its trace: Show trace only Show trace and step dividers with available limits or restrictions Hide trace
4	Change primary result trace. The primary result trace is used as reference and will define the values for the x-axis. Only one trace can be set as primary result. The first selected trace (the left-most tab) is by default used as reference.
5	Tightening details of currently selected result.
6	Switch between available trace types. The following trace graphs are available: Torque / Time Torque / Angle Angle / Time Speed / Time Speed / Angle Gradient / Time (when the related Step Monitor is set) Gradient / Angle (when the related Step Monitor is set) Current / Time Current / Angle

Sync Methods

Sync methods are different strategies to synchronize traces by a specific value.

Traces can be synchronized by, for example, peak torque (highest torque reached for each trace). This shifts all traces along the x-axis, until each curve has its peak torque value at the exact same position on the x-axis.

All subsequent results are given an offset on the x-axis according to one of the following methods:

Sync method	Description
None	Default value. Selected traces are not synced.
Peak / Torque Peak / Angle Peak / Speed Peak / Current Peak / Gradient	All traces are synchronized towards the peak value, that is, shifted along the x-axis so that the peak values are at the same position on the x-axis as the peak value of the primary result.
Custom / Torque Custom / Angle Custom / Speed Custom / Current Custom / Gradient	All traces are synchronized towards a set value, shifted along the x-axis so that the set value are the same at the same position The set value of the primary result is used as reference point on the x-axis. If sync method Custom is selected and none of the traces contains the configured value, an exclamation mark is shown in the custom value field.

If a result has no trace value that matches to the sync method it cannot be synchronized and its trace will not be shown. It will instead be shown with an exclamation mark.

If none of the traces are possible to synchronize, the error message “Unable to synchronize” is shown.

NOK Results List

Error message	Description	Required step category	Reporting step monitors	Reporting step restrictions	Reporting program monitors	Reporting program restrictions
Drive error	Internal drive error or battery removed during tightening
Rehit	Attempt to tighten an already tightened bolt.			Rehit
Soft start torque below min	Soft start torque below minimum level.	SoftStart	Peak Torque Post Thread Cut Peak Torque Shut Off Torque Torque in Angle Window	Torque in Angle Window
Soft start torque above max	Soft start torque exceeded maximum level.	SoftStart	Peak Torque Post Thread Cut Peak Torque Shut Off Torque Torque in Angle Window	Maximum Torque Torque in Angle Window		Maximum Torque Limit
Rundown torque above max	Rundown torque exceeded maximum level.	Rundown	Peak Torque Prevailing Torque Post Thread Cut Peak Torque Shut Off Torque Torque in Angle Window	Maximum Torque Torque in Angle Window		Maximum Torque Limit
Rundown angle above max	Rundown angle exceeded maximum level.	Rundown	Angle Post Thread Cut Angle	Maximum Angle
Rundown exceeding max time limit	Rundown time exceeded maximum limit.	Rundown	Time	Maximum Time
Rundown below min time limit	Rundown time below minimum limit	Rundown	Time
Rundown torque below min	Rundown torque below minimum level.	Rundown	Peak Torque Prevailing Torque Post Thread Cut Peak Torque Shut Off Torque Torque in Angle Window	Torque in Angle Window
Rundown angle below min	Rundown angle below minimum level	Rundown	Angle Post Thread Cut Angle
Final step torque above max	Final step torque exceeded maximum level.	Final	Peak Torque Post Thread Cut Peak Torque Shut Off Torque Torque in Angle Window	Maximum Torque Torque in Angle Window	Torque	Maximum Torque Limit
Final step angle above max	Final step angle exceeded maximum level.	Final	Angle Post Thread Cut Angle	Maximum Angle	Angle
Final step torque below min	Final step torque below minimum level.	Final	Peak Torque Post Thread Cut Peak Torque Shut Off Torque Torque in Angle Window	Torque in Angle Window	Torque
Final step angle below min	Final step angle below minimum level.	Final	Angle Post Thread Cut Angle		Angle
Tightening timeout	Tightening time limit exceeded.					Maximum Time Limit
Trigger lost	Tool trigger was released before target was reached.
Slip off	Socket has slipped off the nut.			Rescinding Torque
Post view torque below min	Post view torque below minimum level.		Post View Torque Low
Post view torque above max	Post view torque exceeded maximum level.		Post View Torque High
Post view torque interval not reached	Post view torque interval not reached.		Post View Torque Low Post View Torque High
Torque compensation interval not reached	Torque compensation interval angle before rundown end not reached		Prevailing Torque
Current monitoring error	Torque vs current deviation exceeds maximum level.			Torque vs Current Deviation
Soft start angle above max	Soft start angle exceeded maximum level.	SoftStart	Angle Post Thread Cut Angle	Maximum Angle
Soft start angle below min	Soft start angle below minimum level	SoftStart	Angle Post Thread Cut Angle
First step angle high	First step angle exceeded maximum level	First	Angle Post Thread Cut Angle	Maximum Angle
First step angle low	First step angle below minimum level	First	Angle Post Thread Cut Angle
First step torque high	First step torque exceeded maximum level	First	Peak Torque Post Thread Cut Peak Torque Shut Off Torque Torque in Angle Window	Maximum Torque Torque in Angle Window		Maximum Torque Limit
First step torque below min	First step torque below minimum level	First	Peak Torque Post Thread Cut Peak Torque Shut Off Torque Torque in Angle Window	Torque in Angle Window
First step exceeded max time limit	First step time exceeded maximum level	First	Time	Maximum Time
First step below min time limit	First step time below minimum level	First	Time
Final step exceeded max time limit	Final step time exceeded maximum level	Final	Time	Maximum Time
Final step below min time limit	Final step time below minimum level	Final	Time
Soft start exceeded max time limit	Soft start time exceeded maximum level	SoftStart	Time	Maximum Time
Current at shut off exceeds max limit	Measured shutoff current exceeding max limit		Shut off current
Current at shut off below min limit	Measured shutoff current below min limit		Shut off current
Step exceeded max time	Step exceeded maximum step time		Time
Stopped	Stopped externally before target was reached

Viewing Protocol Status

Go to Reports in the home menu and select Results in the left pane.
Select the button in the upper right corner. The Protocol Status dialog box appears.

The tabs in the dialog box show the following information:

Tab	Description
Open Protocol	Shows the status of the open protocol connection: OK / NOK
Server Connections	Shows the status of the connections to ToolsTalk and ToolsNet servers: OK / NOK To change the configuration setting Enabled / Disabled, go to Settings > Server Connections and select the server to configure.
Launcher Status	Shows the launcher status of the different system adapters: OK / NOK

Select Close.

Relevant Information

Viewing Events

Events are used to notify the user of certain state changes or occurrences in the system. They are divided into three types; Information, Warnings and Errors and require different kinds of actions.

Each event has a default setting for whether it should be acknowledged (Ack), logged (Log) or displayed (Disp). These settings can be configured in the Settings menu under Events.

View Stored Events

Go to Reports in the home menu and select Events in the left pane.
Select View all events.
Select an event in the list to open the event dialog box.

Relevant Information

Configuring Events

In this Section

The Event Dialog Box

The event dialog box contains information about the occurred event describing what has happened, where and when.

Position	Description
1	Heading - Describes what part of the system the event concerns.
2	Event name - A short descriptive text of the event.
3	Code - A unique four-digit number that identifies the event.
4	Module - Describes in what part of the system the event concerns.
5	Type - Information, Warning or Error.
6	Time - Date and time when the event occurred.

Event Codes

Different types of events are used to notify the user of certain state changes or occurrences in the system. Each event requires a different action.

Some of the procedures described can only be performed by Atlas Copco Service personnel.

For more information about a specific event code, use the below filters or enter the event code search criteria in the search box.

Event Code	Event Type	Event Name	Description	Procedure	Log / Display / Ack / Conf	Available for	Group
none	item	none	none	none	column	list	list
1000	Info	Controller Started	The controller is started.		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
1001	Warning	Controller Serial Number Updated	Generated at start-up if IT-board box serial number (controller serial number) differs from AUX-board box serial number. AUX-board is considered to be non-replaceable in field. The controller will reboot when the serial number is updated.	Replace IT-board or box.	Log Display Ack Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller and Tool
1010	Info	Tool Connected	A tool is connected.		Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
1011	Info	Tool Disconnected	A tool is disconnected.		Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
1012	Info	Tool Rejected Controller Connection	This event can occur if the tool is into a skip-zone.	Verify if another controller is connected to the tool. Make sure that the tool settings are correctly set up.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
2000	Warning	Battery Low		Replace battery.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2001	Warning	Battery Empty		Replace battery.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2002	Warning	Tool Battery Health Low	Tool battery health problem is detected. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.	Replace battery.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2004	Warning	Tool is not of the preferred type	Tool has been replaced by a tool with a different Tool Max Torque.	Change tool.	Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2006	Warning	Tool Backup Battery Health low	The backup battery in the tool has too poor performance.	The backup battery should be replaced.	Log Display Ack Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2007	Warning	Tool Backup Battery Missing or Broken	Tool backup battery is missing or broken. Valid for SRB and TBP tools only.	Insert battery.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2008	Warning	Tool Backup Battery Error	Tool backup battery error detected. Valid for SRB and TBP tools only.	Replace battery.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2009	Warning	Backup Battery Voltage Low	The controller's backup battery is almost empty.	Replace battery.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2010	Error	Tool Software Version Mismatch	Tool and controller software versions not compatible.	Service tool - update tool software.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2012	Warning	Tool Communication Disturbance	Communication between tool and controller interrupted.	Relocate antenna placement.	Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Tool
2013	Warning	Illegal Ring Position	Tool direction switch in faulty position.	If occurring frequently - service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2014	Warning	Tool Overheated	Tool overheated. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.	Allow tool to cool down.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2015	Error	Tool Temperature Sensor Error	SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2016	Warning	Tool Pulse Unit Overheated	Pulse unit overheated. Tool is not locked, but the warning is displayed whenever the tool is started as long as the pulse unit temperature is over threshold. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.	Allow tool to cool down.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2019	Warning	Tool Could not Start Motor	Tool motor failure. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2020	Warning	Tool Requires Motor Tuning	Tool requires motor tuning.	Perform a motor tuning.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2021	Warning	Motor Tuning Failed	Motor tuning failed.	Complete motor tuning or service the tool.	Log	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2022	Info	Motor Tuning Completed	Motor tuning completed.		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2023	Warning	The Tool Requires Open End Tuning	The tool requires open end tuning.	Perform open end tuning.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2024	Warning	Open End Tuning Failed	Open end tuning failed.	Try to perform open end tuning one more time. If it fails again, service the tool.	Log Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2025	Info	Open End Tuning Successful	Open end tuning successful.		Log Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2026	Warning	Open End Position Failed	Open end position failed.	Press the tool trigger again and wait for the positioning to be completed. If it fails again, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2027	Warning	Usage Limited Due To High Tool Temperature	Temperature limit value has been reached. Tightening has been inhibited to reduce risk for tool shutting down due to overheating.	Wait until tool temperature has been reduced.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2030	Error	Tool Memory Failure: Change Tool	Tool memory corrupt.	Service the tool.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2031	Error	Tool Accessory Memory Corrupt	Tool accessory memory corrupt.	Service the tool accessory.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2040	Error	System Check Failure			Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2041	Error	Torque Transducer Error	Will be generated either on calibration error or if tool reports transducer error.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2042	Error	Angle Transducer Error		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2043	Error	Tool Ground Fault Error		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2044	Info	Tool Service Interval Expired	Indicates that servicing of the tool is needed. Triggered when the number of set tightenings has been exceeded.	Perform service of tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2045	Warning	Tool Calibration Data Invalid	If validation of calibration data fails.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2046	Info	Tool: Next Calibration Date Has Passed	Indicates that calibration of tool is needed. Triggered when calibration alarm is enabled in settings and the current time is greater than next calibration date.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2048	Info	Tool Calibration Value Updated By QA Device	Tool calibration was updated when a calibration with a QA device was performed.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2050	Error	Tool Parameter File Not Supported	Required tool parameters are missing.	Update tool parameters.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2060	Info	Unexpected Trigger Behavior	Used to prevent start of tool if accessory is connected.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2071	Error	Tool Memory Corrupt	Tool descriptor is corrupt.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2072	Info	Unknown Device Connected			Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2073	Warning	Tool Trigger Supervision Failure	HW channel failure. Mismatch between hardware and software of tool trigger.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2074	Warning	Tool Indicator Board Failure	Tool indicator board failure.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2075	Warning	Tool Fan Voltage Failure	Tool fan voltage failure.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2076	Warning	Tool Accessory Bus Voltage Failure	Tool accessory bus voltage failure.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2077	Warning	Tool Trigger Sensor Error	Tool trigger sensor error.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2078	Info	Tool Tightening Program Updated	Tool locked due to tightening program update.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2079	Error	Tool Cable Not Supported	Tool cable is corrupt. The chip in the cable is not responding or is damaged.	Switch cable.	Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2080	Error	Tool Battery Failure	DC voltage too high or too low. Battery failure.	Contact the Atlas Copco service representative and send back battery to Atlas Copco (do not reuse it!).	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2081	Error	Tool Current Limit Reached	The current limit value has been reached and the drive is disabled.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2082	Error	Tool Current Measurement Error	Current measurement error. Current cannot be measured with a reliable result.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2083	Error	Tool Internal Error	Various internal hardware errors. Valid for STB and IxB tools only.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2084	Error	Tool Internal Software Error	Various internal software errors. Valid for STB and IxB tools only.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2085	Error	Tool RBU Error	An RBU error was detected by the tool software.	Check that the RBU is correctly installed. If error is still present then service the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2086	Error	Tool Stall	Tool motor is stalling.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2087	Warning	Tool Motor Current High	Tool motor current limit value is exceeded, and the tool is locked. Tool will enter failsafe mode. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2088	Warning	Tool Battery Current High	Tool battery current is too high. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2089	Warning	Tool Drive Voltage Low	Tool drive voltage is below the monitored lower voltage limit value. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2090	Warning	Tool Drive Voltage High	Tool drive voltage is above monitored higher voltage limit value. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2091	Warning	Tool Main Board Error	Tool main board internal error. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tool
2092	Warning	Tool Power Module Error	Tool power module internal error. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2093	Warning	Pulse Unit Oil Level Low	The oil level of the connected pulse tool is low.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2094	Warning	Pulse Unit Oil Level Empty	The oil level of the connected pulse tool is below required operational level.	Service the tool.	Log Display Ack Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2095	Warning	Tool Battery Communication Lost	Tool lost communication with battery. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.	Make sure battery is snugged correctly. Otherwise change battery.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2096	Error	Tool Battery Software Version Mismatch	Tool battery software incompatible with tool software. Valid for SRB, TBP and IxB tools only.	Update software.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2097	Warning	Tool export timeout	The tool export timed out. Please export the logs via USB cable attached to the tool.	Log export.	Log Display Ack Conf	IxB	Tool
2100	Info	STwrench smartHEAD Removed	STwrench smartHEAD has been removed.	Reconnect smartHEAD and restart the wrench.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2101	Warning	Wrench Tightening When Locked	A wrench tightening was performed when the tool status was locked in the controller.	Wait until the tool status in controller is unlocked.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 ToolsControl	Tool
2120	Warning	Unable To Start: Tool Has No Active Torque Transducer			Log Display	Flex	Tool
2121	Warning	Transducers Are Disabled For Connected Tool			Log Display	Flex	Tool
2122	Warning	Unable To Start: Tool Is Missing Required Torque Transducer		Change to a tool with multiple torque transducers or update the setting "Require dual torque" in Tool Configuration.	Log Display	Flex IxB	Tool
2123	Warning	Unable To Start: Tool Is Missing Required Angle Transducer		Change to a tool with multiple torque transducers or update the setting "Require dual torque" in Tool Configuration.	Log Display	Flex	Tool
2125	Error	Torque Transducer Error On Transducer 2	There is an error on torque transducer 2 of a tool with multiple transducers.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex	Tool
2127	Error	Tool Torque Transducer Calibration Error	There is an error on the torque transducer.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Tool
2129	Error	Tool Torque Transducer: Shunt Test Failed	There is an error on the torque transducer.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening XB	Tool
2131	Error	Tool Torque Transducer: Zero Offset Compensation Failed	There is an error on the torque transducer.	Ensure the tightening is started with zero torque on the tool. Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Tool
2133	Error	Tool Torque Transducer Hardware Error	There is an error on the torque transducer.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Tool
2135	Error	Tool Torque Transducer Error: Overflow In A/D Converter	There is an error on the torque transducer.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Tool
2136	Error	Tool Torque Transducer Calibration Error On Transducer 2	There is an error on torque transducer 2 of a tool with multiple transducers.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex	Tool
2137	Error	Tool Torque Transducer Error: Shunt Test Failed On Transducer 2	There is an error on torque transducer 2 of a tool with multiple transducers.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex	Tool
2138	Error	Tool Torque Transducer Error: Zero Offset Compensation Failed On Transducer 2	There is an error on torque transducer 2 of a tool with multiple transducers.	Ensure the tightening is started with zero torque on the tool. Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex	Tool
2139	Error	Tool Torque Transducer Hardware Error On Transducer 2	There is an error on torque transducer 2 of a tool with multiple transducers.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex	Tool
2140	Error	Tool Torque Transducer Error: Overflow In A/D Converter On Transducer 2	There is an error on torque transducer 2 of a tool with multiple transducers.	Service the tool.	Log Display	Flex	Tool
2141	Error	Tool Angle Transducer Error On Transducer 2	Will be generated if tool reports transducer error from angle transducer 2.	Service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 ToolsControl Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Tool
2142	Error	Torque transducer redundancy error	There is an error on torque transducer 2 of a tool with multiple transducers.	Reset redundancy error	Log Display	Power Focus 6000 ToolsControl	Tool
2143	Error	Angle transducer redundancy error	There is an error on torque transducer 2 of a tool with multiple transducers.	Reset redundancy error	Log Display	Power Focus 6000 ToolsControl	Tool
2144	Warning	Tool Angle Transducer 2 Needs Calibration	Angle Transducer 2 needs calibration.	Tool requires motor tuning.	Log Conf Display	Flex Power Focus 6000 ToolsControl Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Tool
2145	Warning	Tool Angle Transducer 3 Needs Calibration	Angle Transducer 3 needs calibration.	Tool requires motor tuning.	Log Conf Display	Flex Power Focus 6000 ToolsControl Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Tool
2146	Error	Tool Angle Transducer Error on Transducer 3	Will be generated if tool reports transducer error from angle transducer 3.	Service the tool.	Log Conf Display	Flex Power Focus 6000 ToolsControl Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Tool
2162	Error	Torque transducer error: Torque value too low	Detected value below limits on torque transducer.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2163	Error	Torque transducer error: Torque value too high	Detected value above limits on torque transducer.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2164	Error	Torque transducer 2 error: Torque value too low	Detected value below limits on torque transducer 2.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2165	Error	Torque transducer 2 error: Torque value too high	Detected value above limits on torque transducer 2.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2166	Error	Tool restarted after an unexpected internal software error.	Tool was restarted after an unexpected internal software error.	Service the tool if problem persists.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2167	Error	Tool internal communication error on transducer module.	Tool internal communication error on transducer module.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2168	Error	Tool internal communication error on transducer module 2.	Tool internal communication error on transducer module 2.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2169	Error	Tool internal communication error with transducer module	Tool internal communication error with transducer module.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2170	Error	Tool transducer module error - Voltage out of range (Vdda on board 2)	Vdda votage is out of range on board 2 of tool transducer module.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2171	Error	Tool transducer module 2 error - Voltage out of range (Torque)	Torque supply voltage is out of range on torque transducer module 2.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2174	Error	Tool transducer module error - Voltage out of range (Vdda on board 1)	Vdda votage is out of range on board 1 of tool transducer module.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2175	Error	Tool transducer module error - CPU temperature high on board 1	CPU temperature is high on board 1 of torque transducer module.	Wait until tool temperature has been reduced. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2176	Error	Tool transducer module error - CPU temperature high on board 2	CPU temperature is high on board 2 of torque transducer module.	Wait until tool temperature has been reduced. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2177	Error	Tool torque transducer production calibration missing.	Production calibration parameters are missing on torque transducer module.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2178	Error	Tool transducer module error - Voltage out of range (Torque)	Torque supply voltage is out of range on torque transducer module.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2179	Error	Tool transducer module 2 error - Voltage out of range (Vdda on board 1)	Vdda votage is out of range on board 1 of tool transducer module 2.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2180	Error	Tool transducer module 2 error - CPU temperature high on board 1	CPU temperature is high on board 1 of torque transducer module 2.	Wait until tool temperature has been reduced. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2181	Error	Tool transducer module 2 error - CPU temperature high on board 2	CPU temperature is high on board 2 of torque transducer module 2.	Wait until tool temperature has been reduced. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2182	Error	Tool torque transducer 2 production calibration missing.	Production calibration parameters are missing on torque transducer module 2.	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2183	Error	Tool transducer module 2 error - Voltage out of range (Vdda on board 2)	Vdda votage is out of range on board 2 of tool transducer module 2	Restart the tool. If the problem persists, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Tool
2202	Error	Tool HMI overcurrent occurred	Tool HMI overcurrent was detected.	Service the tool. Replace tool HMI.	Log Display Ack Conf	IxB	Tool
2203	Error	Tool front light overcurrent occurred	Tool front light overcurrent was detected	Service the tool. Replace tool front light.	Log Display Ack Conf	IxB	Tool
2204	Error	Accessory bus overcurrent occurred	Accessory bus overcurrent was detected.	Service the tool. Replace accessory bus.	Log Display Ack Conf	IxB	Tool
2207	Error	Vibrator overcurrent occurred	Vibrator overcurrent was detected.	Service the tool. Replace the vibrator.	Log Display Ack Conf	IxB	Tool
2208	Warning	System CPU temperature high	System CPU temperature high.	Wait until tool temperature has been reduced.	Log Display Conf	IxB XB	Tool
2209	Error	System CPU temperature critical	System CPU temperature critical.	Wait until tool temperature has been reduced.	Log Display Conf	IxB XB	Tool
2210	Error	Unsupported power source: tightening not permitted	Battery with too low voltage attached to the tool.	Attach battery with higher voltage to the tool.	Log Display Ack Conf	IxB	Tool
2217	Info	Running on backup battery	Running on backup battery.		Log	IxB	Tool
2218	Info	Battery connected	Battery connected or controller/tool started.		Log	IxB	Tool
2219	Info	Power source: unknown	Unknown power source connected or controller/tool started with unknown power source.		Log	IxB	Tool
2220	Error	Tool fan failure	Applies to IPB-P.	Service the tool.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2221	Warning	Battery overheated	Battery temperature is too high.	Change battery and let overheated battery cool down.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 ToolsControl	Tool
2222	Warning	Usage limited due to high battery temperature	Battery temperature is too high.	Change battery and let overheated battery cool down.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 ToolsControl	Tool
2223	Error	Front LED is not available	When the tool boots up, if the front LED is not detected, this event will be triggered.	Fix the front light or the front light cable connection.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8	Controller and Tool
2224	Error	Front LED color is not available	When the tool boots up, if the front LED color is not detected, this event will be triggered.	Fix the front light color or the front light cable connection	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8	Controller and Tool
2225	Error	RHMI buttons are not available	When the tool boots up, if the RHMI buttons are not detected, an event will be triggered.	Fix the RHMI buttons.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8	Controller and Tool
2226	Error	LED ring is not available	When the tool boots up, if the LED ring is not detected, an event will be triggered.	Fix the back ring lights or the back ring light connection.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8	Controller and Tool
2227	Error	Fan is not available	When the tool boots up, if the fan is not detected, an event will be triggered.	Fix the fan.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8	Controller and Tool
2228	Error	RRE board is not available	When the tool boots up, if the tool board interface is not detected, an event will be triggered.	Fix the tool board interface.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8	Controller and Tool
2229	Warning	Tool Backup battery empty	Tool backup battery is empty.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2230	Info	Tool Backup battery fully charged	Tool backup battery is fully charged.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2231	Warning	Tool Backup Battery Missing	Tool backup battery is missing.	Insert battery.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2232	Warning	Tool Backup Battery Broken	Tool backup battery is broken.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tool
2233	Warning	Tool restricted battery support	Tool can not perform on its configured max torque or speed with this type of battery.	Replace battery with version specified for this type of tool.	Log Conf Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2234	Warning	Poor angle signal quality	Motortune required. If the event pops up shortly after a motor tune, the tool needs service.	Motor tune tool.	Log Conf Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2300	Error	Tool main board error - Voltage out of range (Torque)		Restart the tool. If the error persist, service the tool an look for lose connections in the cable connectors. Inspect any possible damage in the cables.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2301	Error	Tool main board error - Voltage out of range (Analog)		Restart the tool. If the error persist, service the tool an look for lose connections in the cable connectors. Inspect any possible damage in the cables.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2302	Error	Tool main board error - Voltage out of range (MCU Vdd)		Restart the tool. If the error persist, service the tool an look for lose connections in the cable connectors. Inspect any possible damage in the cables.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2303	Error	Tool main board error - Voltage out of range (Step up)		Restart the tool. If the error persist, service the tool an look for lose connections in the cable connectors. Inspect any possible damage in the cables.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2304	Error	Tool main board error - Voltage out of range (UPS)		Restart the tool. If the error persist, service the tool an look for lose connections in the cable connectors. Inspect any possible damage in the cables.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2305	Error	Tool main board error - Voltage out of range (Tool power)		Restart the tool. If the error persist, service the tool an look for lose connections in the cable connectors. Inspect any possible damage in the cables.	Log Display Ack	IxB XB	Tool
2306	Error	Tool main board error - Voltage out of range (Vdd)		Restart the tool. If the error persist, service the tool an look for lose connections in the cable connectors. Inspect any possible damage in the cables.	Log Display Ack	IxB XB	Tool
2307	Error	Tool main board error - Hardware failure (IMU)		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2331	Error	Tool power module error - Voltage low (Reference)		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2332	Error	Tool power module error - Voltage high (Reference)		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2333	Error	Tool power module error - Voltage low (UPS)		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2334	Error	Tool power module error - Voltage high (UPS)		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2335	Error	Tool power module error - Voltage low (Backup domain)		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2336	Error	Tool power module error - Voltage high (Backup domain)		Service the tool.	Log Display Ack	IxB	Tool
2377	Warning	Open end tune timeout	Open end tuning timed Out.	Resume operation after temperature drops, service if recurring.	Log Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 IxB	Controller and Tool
2378	Error	Motor tune failure: Unknown angle error		Service the tool.	Log	IxB	Tool
2379	Error	Motor tune failure: Angle sample failed		Service the tool.	Log	IxB	Tool
2380	Error	Motor tune failure: Angle accumulation		Service the tool.	Log	IxB	Tool
2381	Error	Motor tune failure: Angle signal inverted		Service the tool.	Log	IxB	Tool
2382	Error	Motor tune failure: Angle signal stuck		Service the tool.	Log	IxB	Tool
2383	Error	Motor tune failure: Angle signal different to RRE	Angle signal different to RRE (motor angle).	Service the tool.		IxB	Tool
2500	Error	Tensioner puller bar max number	Tensioner puller bar must be replaced. System is locked for usage. Pressure can only be released.	Send the tensioner to service organization for replacement of the puller bar.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2501	Error	Pump motor protection alarm	The pump motor protection has stopped the motor. The system must stop. If the system is under pressure, it needs manual actions to release pressure.	Turn off the system. If under pressure, mechanically release the pressure and send the pump to service.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2502	Error	Pump motor oil level low alarm	The pump motor oil level is low which has stopped the motor. If the system is under pressure, it needs manual actions to release pressure.	Turn off the system. If under pressure, mechanically release the pressure and top up oil.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2503	Error	Pump motor oil temperature high alarm	The pump motor oil temperature is high.	Turn off the system and wait for the oil to cool down.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2504	Error	Tensioner pressure sensor alarm	Failure in the pressure sensor electronics of the tensioner. No pressure can be read nor reported to the system.	Turn off the system. If under pressure, mechanically release the pressure and send the tensioner to service.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2505	Error	Pump pressure sensor alarm	Failure in the pressure sensor electronics of the pump. No pressure can be read nor reported to the system.	Turn off the system. If under pressure, mechanically release the pressure and send the pump to service.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2506	Error	Unexpected clockwise rotation detected	A clockwise nut rotation while waiting for pressure release after completed tensioning. The result is invalidated.	Release pressure and tension the nut again.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus HC	Tool
2507	Error	Unexpected counter clockwise rotation detected	A counter clockwise nut rotation while waiting for pressure release after completed tensioning. The result is invalidated.	Release pressure and tension the nut again.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus HC	Tool
2508	Error	Pump or tensioner pressure sensor failure	Too large difference between the pressure sensor readings in the pump and the tensioner. Pressurization is halted.	Problem in the hydraulics or the calibration of the pressure sensors. Restart the system and try again. If the problem repeats, contact your local Atlas Copco sales representative.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2509	Error	Tensioner pressure sensor failure or hydraulic hose failure	The tensioner's pressure sensor indicates no pressure but the pump's sensor reads a pressure increase. Pressurization is halted.	Problem in the hydraulics or the calibration of the pressure sensors. Restart the system and try again. If the problem repeats, contact your local Atlas Copco sales representative.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2510	Error	Set custom ID failed	Setting custom ID failed.	Restart the system and check the connected devices. If Custom ID for the unit is wrong, redo the setting.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2511	Info	Custom ID is set	Setting custom ID succeeded.		Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2512	Warning	Malformed Barcode string, ignored	The scanned string could not be parsed as a tower data bar code.	Scan a proper tower data qr code or scan tower section id.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2513	Error	No pump pressure detected	The system is trying to pressurize but no pressure increase is registered in the pump. Possible cause is incorrect phase order in the three phase connector.	Power off the system and reverse the phases of the power connector.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2514	Warning	Tensioner overtorque alarm	Too high torque is applied to the click wrench. This causes damage to the torque sensor.	Relax the torque.	Log	Power Focus HC	Tool
2515	Warning	Tensioner overpressure alarm	The pressure in the tensioner is too high.	Let the pressure drop, or release the pressure. Check the hydraulic pressure parameters.	Log	Power Focus HC	Tool
2516	Warning	Unexpected Pump or Tensioner firmware	Unexpected Pump or Tensioner firmware version detected, restart system. If the problem persists, the system may be possible to run, but carefully observe any unexpected behaviour.	Power cycle system	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2517	Error	Incompatible Pump or Tensioner firmware version, restart system. The system cannot run.	Incompatible Pump or Tensioner firmware version, restart system. The system cannot run.	Restart system, if this doesn’t help replace the failing unit. Check connected devices to see which one has not connected.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2518	Error	Physical safety signal failed.	Safety signal from the hand controller has not reached the pump	Check the cable connected to the tensioner If the event re occurs contact service	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2519	Error	System entered fail safe mode	Fail safe mode activated	User acknowledgment required	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2520	Error	System exits fail safe mode	Fail safe mode deactivated	System returns to normal function	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2523	Error	Communication lost with the tensioner	Communication lost with the tensioner	Check the cable connected to the tensioner Event can occur when the system is powered off	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2524	Error	Communication lost with the pump	Communication lost with the pump	. Check the cables are connected Event can occur when the system is powered off	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2525	Error	Action requested from the hand controller is not performed by the pump	Action requested from the hand controller is not performed by the pump	Try again If this event occurs often contact service.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus HC	Tool
2800	Error	There is an error on the clutch sensor	Check sensor and clutch assembly	If this event occurs often contact service.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus 6000 Power focus 8	Tool
2801	Error	Triggered when clutch settings alarm is enabled in settings and the current time is greater than next clutch settings date	Indicates that clutch settings of tool is needed	If this event occurs often contact service.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus 6000 Power focus 8	Tool
3000	Error	Controller Internal Software Error	Software error in the controller.	Contact service.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller
3001	Error	Controller Clock Battery Empty	Internal battery is getting close to end of life.	Replace battery.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3002	Error	Drive Internal Software Error	Software error in the drive.	Contact service.	Log Display Conf	Flex Synchronized tightening	Drive
3010	Warning	System Overheated	The controller is overheated.	Cool down.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3011	Warning	Drive Overheated Controller Hardware		Cool down.	Log Display Conf	Flex ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3013	Warning	Usage Limited Due To High Controller Temperature	Temperature limit value has been reached. Tightening has been inhibited to reduce risk for controller shutting down due to overheating.	Wait until controller temperature has been reduced.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3020	Warning	Controller Hardware Failure			Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3021	Warning	System Voltage Problem	DC voltage too high or too low.		Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3022	Warning	Controller Voltage Problem: AC Input Voltage Too High	DC voltage too high or too low.	Fix the input voltage.	Log Display	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3023	Warning	Controller Voltage Problem: AC Input Voltage Too Low	DC voltage too high or too low.	Fix the input voltage.	Log Display	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3024	Warning	Drive Voltage Problem: AC Input Voltage Too High	DC voltage too high or too low.	Fix the input voltage.	Log Display	Flex ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3025	Warning	Drive Voltage Problem: AC Input Voltage Too Low	DC voltage too high or too low.	Fix the input voltage.	Log Display	Flex ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3026	Info	Max number of IxB Connect tools already connected.	Indicates that the number of IxB Connect tools connected to the controller has reached the max. allowed connected tools.		Log	ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
3027	Info	The access point lost Bluetooth connection	Bluetooth connection to the tool has been lost.	Bluetooth link between tool and controller was interrupted. Check distance, interference, and Bluetooth settings. Reconnect or re-pair the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 IxB	Controller and Tool
3028	Info	The access point lost network connection	Connection to the wireless access point has been lost.	Wireless access point connection lost. Verify AP availability, signal strength, and credentials. Restore Wi-Fi connection.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 IxB	Controller and Tool
3029	Info	The client lost network connection	The tool has lost the network connection by either leaving the network coverage or due to another cause.	Troubleshoot by checking the roaming threshold and reduce the selected channel numbers to less than 24 to make sure roaming is enabled.	Log Display Conf Ack	IxB	Controller and Tool
3030	Error	IP Address Conflicting With Another Node On The Network	The set IP address is in use by another device on the same network.	Change IP address on one of the devices.	Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3031	Info	Network Cable Unplugged	The carrier of the factory port is lost (cable disconnected).	Check the cable connection.	Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3032	Info	Pairing Started	Tool pairing started.		Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3033	Info	Pairing Successful	Tool pairing successful.		Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3034	Info	Pairing Unsuccessful: No Tool Found	The controller found no tool to pair with when scanning for radio peers.	Set the tool in pairing mode and try again.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3035	Error	Pairing Unsuccessful: More Than One Tool Found	The controller found more than one tool when scanning for radio peers.	Ensure that only one tool is in pairing mode when starting the pairing mode on the controller.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3036	Error	Pairing Unsuccessful: Communication Error	The controller experienced a loss of connection, an unexpected answer or timeout during the pairing process.	Try to perform pairing one more time. If it fails again, service the tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3037	Info	Pairing Unsuccessful: Tool Slot Is Full		Clear one tool slot.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3040	Warning	Emergency Stop	Drive disabled due to emergency stop.	Reset emergency stop.	Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3045	Info	Toolsnet server communication failed. Please check the Server Connections tab of Protocol Status dialog for more information.	Communication with the ToolsNet server failed.	Communication with ToolsNet server failed. Check network connectivity and server status. Restore server connection.	Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC	Controller and Tool
3046	Info	Toolsnet server communication established	Communication with the ToolsNet server is restored.	ToolsNet server communication restored. Verify data synchronization. No action required.	Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC	Controller and Tool
3047	Info	Toolstalk server communication failed. Please check the Server Connections tab of Protocol Status dialog for more information.	Communication with the ToolTalk server failed.	Connection to ToolTalk server lost. Check network and ToolTalk service. Restore server communication.	Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller and Tool
3048	Info	Toolstalk server communication established	Communication with the ToolTalk server is restored.	ToolTalk server communication restored. Verify normal data exchange. No action required.	Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller and Tool
3050	Info	System Clock Updated	System clock has been updated.		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3051	Error	System Clock Error	Wrong time read from hardware Real Time Clock (RTC).	Change RTC battery.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3052	Warning	Remote Start Configuration Error	Mismatch between HW and SW remote start configuration.	Verify that HW dip switch matches the selected start source.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3053	Info	Drive Connected	Synchronized tightening drive has been connected.		Log Display	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3054	Info	Drive Disconnected	Drive disconnected from controller.	Check cabling and power-supply for externally connected drives or replace the controller.	Log Display	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3055	Warning	Mode Configuration Error	Generated when selected mode is configured wrongly. E.g. configuring two bolts with the same bolt number or the same channel, incomplete mode configuration.	Check ToolsTalk 2 for mode configuration error.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3056	Warning	Unable to Start: Tool Or Drive Is Missing	Generated when a used channel is missing a drive or tool.	Verify Channel Menu on the HMI. Connect missing drive or tool.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3057	Info	Unable to Start: Channel Is Already In Use	Generated when a needed channel has been allocated to another virtual station.		Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3058	Info	No Mode Selected		Select mode.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3059	Warning	Failed To Connect To Atlas Copco License Manager	Indicates that the controller failed to connect to the local license manager to get licenses.	Verify the local network. If it fails again, service the controller.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3060	Error	Number of Virtual Station licenses is exceeded.	Virtual Station license greater than available licenses.	Update licenses or Virtual Station configuration.	Log Display Ack	ToolsControl	Controller
3061	Warning	Unable To Start: Enable Signal Is Low		Ensure the signal "Enable Operation" is set to high before tightening is started.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3062	Warning	Unable To Start: Stop Signal Is High		Ensure the signal "Enable Operation" is set to low before tightening is started.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3063	Warning	Unable To Start: All Channels Inhibited	All channels have been set inhibited, so no tightening can be started.	Set at least one channel to not be inhibited.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3064	Warning	Carrier Number Faulty	A FlexCarrier hex switch is set to zero.	Turn the switch to a non-zero value.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3065	Warning	Carrier E-Stop Configuration Plug Wrong Type Or Missing	A Carrier is missing its E-stop configuration plug, or the plug type is wrong.	Insert correct plug type.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3066	Warning	Carrier Voltage Inlet: No 3-Phase AC		Ensure the 3-phase power to the carrier is within acceptable limits and fully functional. Ensure the 3-phase cables are in good condition and properly connected.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3067	Warning	Carrier Voltage Inlet: One AC Phase Missing		Ensure the 3-phase power to the carrier is within acceptable limits and fully functional. Ensure the 3-phase cables are in good condition and properly connected.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3068	Warning	Carrier: Internal 24 VDC Power Supply Unit Broken		Service the carrier.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3069	Warning	Carrier 24 Voltage OUT-Port Disabled Due To Over-Current		Reset the system.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3070	Warning	Carrier, Hardware Error In PF6 FlexControl Cable OUT		Reset the system.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3071	Warning	Carrier, Hardware Error In PF6 FlexControl Cable IN		Reset the system.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3072	Warning	Emergency Stop 24 VDC Power Failure Due To Short-Circuit		Service the carrier.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3073	Warning	Unable To Start: System Is Emergency Stopped	When allocating multiple spindles, this event is invoked by "preStartCheckFailed" due to emergency stop.	Reset the emergency stop.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3074	Warning	Carrier Overheated		Cool down.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3075	Warning	Carrier Temperature OK			Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3076	Warning	Carrier: Internal 24 VDC Power Supply Overload	Current output from internal PSU is too high.	Disconnect other carriers that are powered from the PSU. Disconnect any external equipment using 24 VDC.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3077	Warning	Carrier: Internal 24 VDC Power Supply Over Voltage	Voltage output from internal PSU is too high.	Replace the carrier.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3078	Warning	Carrier: Internal 24 VDC Power Supply Under Voltage	Voltage output from internal PSU is too low.	Replace the carrier.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3079	Warning	External Supply To Carrier: 24 VDC Over Voltage	Backup input voltage is more than 27 VDC.	Adjust the backup input voltage.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3080	Warning	External Supply To Carrier: 24 VDC Under Voltage	Backup input voltage is less than 19 VDC.	Adjust the backup input voltage.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3081	Warning	Carrier Voltage Inlet: 3-Phase AC Over Voltage	Input voltage is too high.	Lower input voltage: must be 400 VAC or 480 VAC.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3082	Warning	Carrier Voltage Inlet: 3-Phase AC Under Voltage	Input voltage is too low.	Higher input voltage: must be 400 VAC or 480 VAC.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3083	Error	Wrong Anybus/Profisafe Module Firmware		Update the firmware in the anybus module to the latest version.	Log Display	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3084	Error	Soft PLC Runtime Error	eCLR has terminated in an uncontrolled way.		Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3085	Warning	Carrier: Fan Module Out Of Order		Replace fan module.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3086	Warning	Carrier: Fan Module Partly Out Of Order		Replace fan module.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3087	Warning	Carrier: Left Fan Module Out Of Order		Replace fan module.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3088	Warning	Carrier: Left Fan Module Partly Out Of Order		Replace fan module.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3089	Warning	Carrier: Right Fan Module Out Of Order		Replace fan module.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3090	Warning	Carrier: Right Fan Module Partly Out Of Order		Replace fan module.	Log Display	Flex	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3091	Info	Sync member channel collision	Generated when two or more sync members are configured to the same channel.	Reconfigure the colliding sync member to have a unique or different channel that has not been allocated to another sync member.	Log Conf Display Ack	Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3093	Warning	Digital input received before the trigger is pressed.	Indicates that something went wrong with setup.		Log Conf Display Ack	Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3095	Warning	WiFi Signal Strength Low	The wireless network signal strength is below the value set in setting "Warn on signal strength below (dBm)".		Conf	IxB	Controller and Tool
3096	Warning	Cellular signal strength low	The RSSI value for the cellular connection is under the defined threshold value of -98 dBm.	Move the tool closer to the cellular antennas for a stronger connection and avoid data loss.	Conf	IxB	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3097	Warning	Cellular connection lost	The system lost connection to the cellular network.	Move the tool closer to the cellular antennas. Check the cellular connection setup so correct APN is still configured. Check the cellular network for any problems.	Log Display Conf	IxB	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3100	Warning	Mode Configuration Does Not Exist		Select an existing sync mode before starting a tightening.	Log Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3150	Error	Software IAM Incompatibility	IAM is incompatible with the software that is installed on the controller.	Replace IAM.	Log Display Ack	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3160	Error	Failed To Activate Newly Installed Software	Something went wrong during the activation. When the newly installed software starts, a fallback to the previous working software happens. This error happens when the new software fails to start for three times and only during software installation.	Take an export and contact Atlas Copco for further assistance. Note down the software version you are trying to install as well as the software version that is working.	Log Display Ack	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3161	Error	Started On Unexpected Software Partition	The controller has started on the inactive software side and not on the expected software side.	Note down the software information (on the Home screen of the controller, select Controller > Software). Try to restart the controller and make sure its running on correct software when started again. If error persists, do an export and contact Atlas Copco.	Log Display Ack	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3162	Info	Software Upgrade Verification Failed	Failed to verify the integrity and authenticity of the software package.	Ensure that the software package that is being upgraded to is a signed, software package. Note down the software information (on the Home screen of the controller, select Controller > Software). If error persists, do an export and contact Atlas Copco.	Log Display Ack	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3180	Info	Software Adapter Import Verification Failed	Failed to verify the integrity and authenticity of the imported protocol adapters.	Make sure that the protocol adapters that are being imported are signed, protocol adapters. If error persists, do an export and contact Atlas Copco.	Log Display Ack	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3200	Warning	SPC configuration error	Invalid or missing SPC configuration detected.	Invalid or incomplete SPC configuration detected. Review SPC parameters and limits. Correct SPC configuration.	Log Conf Display	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8	Controller
3500	Error	Generic License Manager Error	Inconsistency detected in the feature management system used.	Contact Atlas Copco representative.	Log Display Ack	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3501	Error	License Manager Synchronization Error	Synchronization with the license server failed.	Contact Atlas Copco service representative.	Log Display Ack	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3502	Info	License Manager Synchronization Done	Synchronization with the license server completed.			IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3503	Warning	License Manager: Another Source in Use	License is used by another source.	Verify license assignment.	Log Display	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3504	Warning	License Manager Restart Needed		Restart license manager.	Log Display	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3505	Info	USB License Synchronization Started	Moving licenses from the USB license dongle started.		Log	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl Power Focus HC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3506	Error	USB License Synchronization Error	Moving licenses from the USB license dongle failed.	Contact Atlas Copco service representative.	Log	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl Power Focus HC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3507	Info	USB License Synchronization Done	Moving licenses from the USB license dongle done.		Log	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus HC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3508	Info	One or more of your licenses are about to expire. Please make sure you have a license server configured		Update licenses.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3509	Error	Too many FMS Portables in use. Please return licenses to a previously used FMS Portable in order to use this one.	Too many license dongles are connected.	More license dongles connected than supported. Verify number of connected dongles. Remove excess dongles.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller
3510	Error	There is already a Local License Server in use. Return all licenses to the server prior to configuring a new one.	Inconsistency detected in a license to be used during configuration.	Update licenses.	Log Display Ack	ToolsControl	Controller
3511	Warning	One of your licenses has a different license definition	Inconsistency detected in a license to be used.	Contact Atlas Copco representative.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl Power Focus HC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3512	Error	Unexpected license service error. Contact Atlas Copco for further assistance.		Contact Atlas Copco representative.	Log Conf Display Ack	ToolsControl	Controller
3550	Warning	License Is Missing		Install the correct license.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl Power Focus HC	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3551	Warning	Wireless Communication Disabled By Licensing		Unassign Standalone license from the Virtual Station.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Controller, Drive and Synchronized tightening
3600	Info	System restart triggered by user	Restart is triggered as a consequence of a user action within the system, such as: After importing an export. Activating new software after software update. Swapping software side. Performing a service task that require a system restart. Open end tuning on IxB. Switching from WiFi to Bluetooth on IxB.		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC	Controller and Tool
3601	Info	Unexpected system shut down	The system rebooted or shut down unexpectedly		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
3610	Info	System shut down due to power loss	Power switch is pressed or controller is disconnected from power source		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
3611	Info	Backup battery timer timed out, shutting down	Tool have been runnning on backup battery for more than 20s		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
3612	Info	System shut down due to inactivity	Inactivity timeout has expired		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Controller and Tool
3700	Info	A broken result has been discarded.	Partial or incomplete result which is classified as broken has been discarded.		Log Conf Ack	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller
4010	Info	Tool Locked By Digital Input	The tool is locked by a digital input signal.		Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4011	Info	Tool Locked By Open Protocol	The tool is locked by Open Protocol.		Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4012	Info	Tool Locked By Fieldbus	The tool is locked by the Fieldbus.		Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Tightening Process
4013	Info	Tool Locked By Socket Selector	Tool is locked when the socket selector is disconnected from the Virtual Station.	Unlock by Master Unlock.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4014	Info	Tool Locked By Soft PLC	Soft PLC signal locked the tool.	Unlock by Master Unlock.	Log Display Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Tightening Process
4015	Info	Loosening Disabled	Loosening is disabled in the tightening program.		Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tightening Process
4016	Info	Tightening Disabled			Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl XB	Tightening Process
4017	Info	Loosening Not Configured	Loosening is not configured in the selected tightening program	Select different tightening program.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4020	Info	Too Many NOK Tightenings	Maximum consecutive NOK tightenings in batch is exceeded		Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4021	Info	Too many consecutive loosenings	Maximum consecutive loosenings configured in General Virtual Station has been reached	An external input has to unlock and reset by signal Reset too many loosening lock or Master unlock.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Sync Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Group
4025	Info	No Tightening Program Selected	No tightening program selected.	Select tightening program or batch sequence.	Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4030	Info	Batch Sequence Aborted	The batch sequence has been aborted.		Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4031	Info	Max Time To Complete Batch Sequence Reached			Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4032	Info	Max Time To Complete First Tightening Reached			Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4033	Warning	Max time to complete tightening operation exceeded	Tightening exceeded the maximum allowed time.	Tightening exceeded allowed completion time. Check fastener presence and tightening program. Correct fastening condition or parameters.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Controller and Tool
4034	Warning	Max time to complete operations in work zone exceeded	Operation exceeded the allowed time in the work zone.	Operation exceeded allowed work zone time. Verify work zone configuration and sequence. Adjust work zone or operation flow.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Controller and Tool
4035	Info	Locked By Line Control			Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4040	Info	Locked By Alternative Identifier	Tool locked by alternative identifier.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4050		Invalid Socket Configuration	Tightening program assigned to multiple sockets.	Tightening program assigned to multiple sockets.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4060	Info	Tool Locked On Batch Complete	When running a batch with flag Tool lock on batch sequence complete this event is generated when the user press the trigger.	Unlock with signal Unlock Tool on complete.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4061	Info	Tool locked by tool diagnostic mode	Tool is locked due to diagnostics mode is ON.	Tool locked due to active diagnostics mode. Check tool mode in controller. Exit diagnostics mode to unlock tool.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Controller and Tool
4062	Info	Tool Locked By Result Synchronization	Results from tool are being synchronized with the controller.	Wait until result sync is done to restart work.	Log Display Conf Ack	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4063	Info	Tool Locked due to transducer redundancy error	Tool is locked due toredundancy error.		Log Display	Power Focus 6000 ToolsControl
4064	Info	Tool Locked by Automation Rules	Tool is locked by Automation rules.	No action	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl
4065	Info	Tool locked by test tightening	Tool is started when test tightening mode is active.	Exit test tightening	Log Conf Display	Flex Synchronized tightening	Tightening Process
4070	Info	Process Enter Manual Mode	Indicates that manual mode has been activated for a virtual station.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4071	Info	Process Enter Automatic Mode	Indicates that automatic mode has been entered for a virtual station.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4072	Info	Test Bolt			Conf	Flex Synchronized tightening	Tightening Process
4073	Info	Tool zero position updated	Indicates that the tool zero position is set using signals.		Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4100	Warning	Identifier Not Accepted: Invalid String Length			Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4101	Warning	String Selection Unsuccessful: Multiple Matches			Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4102	Warning	String Selection Unsuccessful: No Match Found			Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4103	Warning	Identifier Not Accepted: Identical String Already Received			Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4104	Warning	Identifier Not Accepted: No Match Found			Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4105	Warning	Assembly task selection unsuccessful: No match found			Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4106	Warning	Assembly task selection unsuccessful: Multiple matches			Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4107	Warning	Wrong location for selected assembly task	The assembly work task has been configured to use device location to validate but not select assembly tasks. The selected assembly task is allowed to start when the controller/tool is at the expected location.	Move the controller to the expected work zone.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4108	Warning	The assembly work task has been deleted	The active assembly work task (selected in the virtual station) has been deleted.	Select the new/correct assembly work task as the task in the virtual station.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4109	Warning	The assembly task has already been completed			Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4110	Warning	The selected assembly task is uncompleted	New input has been provided to the controller suggesting that a new assembly task should be selected when one is already selected and in progress (i.e. at least one tightening has been performed).	Return to the work zone and complete the started assembly task or abort it to be able to select another assembly task.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4111	Warning	Invalid assembly task priorities	In the controller there are at least two different assembly tasks which are configured with the same priority value. This is not allowed if the assembly tasks are supposed to be selected together one after the other i.e. a multiselection.	Check the assembly task configurations.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4112	Warning	PAT build data has been requested	The assembly work task has been configured to request new PAT build data when an unknown product identifier is provided to the controller. Such a request has been made and while in progress the tool will be locked until it either succeeds or time out.	Wait for request to complete or time out.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4113	Warning	PAT build data is missing	The assembly work task has been configured to request new PAT build data when an unknown product identifier is provided to the controller. Such a request has been made and was unsuccessful i.e. the provided product identifier is still unknown.	Check PAT build data and data/logs in customer upper layer system	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4114	Warning	External dependencies not ready	The assembly task has been configured to require clearance from a customer upper layer system before it is allowed to be selected.	Check PAT build data and data/logs in customer upper layer system	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4115	Warning	No assembly task selected			Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4116	Warning	Assembly task aborted, process timer expired	The assembly task has been configured to use one or more process timers which will trigger an abort if not satisfied in time. See the assembly task configuration for more details.		Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4117	Warning	Assembly task resume error, abort required	The assembly task to resume (or the parent assembly work task) has been modified in such as way that it cannot be resumed. An abort is required to confirm this, which will then allow new assembly task selections to be made.	Preform an abort. On IXB tools this can be done in the batch operations menu the EHMI/RHMI.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4119	Warning	Assembly task not found	The list of assembly task IDs in the assembly work task contains at least one invalid ID (the corresponding assembly task does not exist in the controller).	Check the assembly work task configuration	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4120	Warning	Assembly task configuration error	General error code for an unknown assembly task configuration error.	Check the assembly task configurations. See the worktask log for details.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4121	Warning	Tightening task not set for assembly task	An assembly task doesn't have a tightening task (tightening program or batch sequence etc.) configured.	Check the assembly task configurations.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4122	Warning	Tightening task not found for assembly task	The id of the configured tightening task in an assembly task is invalid (the corresponding tightening task doesn't exist in the controller).	Check the assembly task configurations.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4123	Warning	Assembly task has no joint ids	An assembly task is configured to use "Batch control - Joint id" but no joint ids have been configured and none can be found in the PAT build data.	Check the assembly task configurations and PAT build data.	Log Conf Display	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening ToolsControl	Controller
4500	Info	Result DriveError	Internal driver error or driver loss detected.		Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4501	Info	Result Rehit	Attempt to tighten an already tightened bolt when Rehit detection is on.	Step Category for the Start Stage must be set to Soft Start.	Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4502	Info	Result Soft Start Torque Low	Soft start torque below minimum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4503	Info	Result Soft Start Torque High	Soft start torque exceeded maximum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4504	Info	Result Self Tap Torque High	Self-tap torque exceeded maximum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4505	Info	Result Self Tap Torque Low	Self-tap torque below minimum limit.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4506	Info	Result Safety Torque Low	Automatically calculated torque value to ensure torque sensor is mounted correctly.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4507	Info	Result Rundown Torque High	Rundown torque exceeded maximum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4508	Info	Result Rundown Angle High	Rundown angle exceeded maximum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4509	Info	Result Rundown Time High	Rundown time exceeded maximum limit.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4510	Info	Result Rundown Time Low	Rundown time below minimum limit.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4511	Info	Result Rundown Torque Low	Rundown torque below minimum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4512	Info	Result Rundown Angle Low	Rundown angle below minimum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4513	Info	Result Final Torque High	Final step torque exceeded maximum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4514	Info	Result Final Angle High	Final step angle exceeded maximum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4515	Info	Result Final Torque Low	Final step torque below minimum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4516	Info	Result Final Angle Low	Final step angle below minimum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4517	Info	Result Tightening Timeout	Tightening time limit exceeded. For General Tightening Strategies max tightening time is 30 seconds. For Multistep max tightening time depends on step restriction Maximum Time Limit. Error code is dependent on tightening stage.	Redo tightening.	Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4518	Info	Result Trigger Lost	Tool trigger was released before target was reached. For General Tightening Strategies it is not allowed to release the trigger before the tightening stage has finished. For Multistep, the error is displayed when trigger is lost before the target in a specific step is reached.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4519	Info	Premature Torque Loss	Socket has slipped off the nut.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4520	Info	Result Target Reached Before Final Step	Target torque reached before final step in tightening program.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4521	Info	Result Post View Torque Low	Post view torque below minimum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4522	Info	Result Post View Torque High	Post view torque exceeded maximum level.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4523	Info	Result Post View Torque Interval Not Reached	Post view torque interval not reached.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4524	Info	Result Torque Compensation Interval Not Reached	Torque compensation interval angle before rundown end not reached.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4525	Info	Result Tool Movement Exceeded	From a NOK tightening detailed status.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4526	Info	Result SafetyCurrMon Sensor Mismatch	Current monitoring error.			IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4527	Info	Result Tool Movement Exceeded				IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4538	Info	Result Final Supervision Torque Low	Final Supervision Torque was not reached.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4543	Info	Result Snug Monitor High	Wrench only. Monitor detected snug value exceeded.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4545	Info	Result No Residual Torque	Wrench only. Residual torque was under threshold.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4546	Info	Result Overspeed	Wrench only. Wrench gyro failed to measure angle due to high speed.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4547	Info	Result Effective Loosening	Wrench only. Wrench detected unexpected loosening.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4548	Info	Result Final Less Than Target	Final torque is below target torque set in tightening program.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4549	Info	TurboTight Time Limit Exceeded			Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4550	Info	Result Rundown Pulses High	Maximum number of rundown pulses is exceeded.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4551	Info	Result Rundown Pulses Low	Rundown is completed before the minimum number of rundown pulses is reached.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4552	Info	Result Final Pulses High	Maximum number of pulses is exceeded.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4553	Info	Result Final Pulses Low	Tightening is completed before the minimum number of pulses is reached.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4554	Info	Current At Shutoff High	Current at shut off exceeded Current Limit High.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4555	Info	Current At Shutoff Low	Shut off current measured was below Current Limit Low.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4556	Info	Uncategorized Multistep Error	An error in the multistep configuration, often with tool validation.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4557	Info	Result Overload			Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4558	Info	Result pulse drive socket not detected	Pulse drive socket was not detected.	Pulse drive socket not detected by tool. Check socket installation and compatibility. Install correct socket or service tool.	Log Display	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8	Controller
4559	Info	Result Stopped	The event is triggered when an external stop signal or lock signal is aborting an ongoing tightening. The event is introduced to distinguish between trigger loss and external stop.		Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Tightening Process
4600	Warning	Data Drop or Data Hold used in combination with Batch Tightening. The signals have no effect		Data Drop and Data Hold are only supported for worktasks, without batch control. Select another worktask if the signals must be used.		Flex Synchronized tightening	Tightening Process
4601	Info	Data Hold Active: tightening result is sent once signal is low				Flex Synchronized tightening	Tightening Process
4602	Info	Data Drop active: tightening result discarded				Flex Synchronized tightening	Tightening Process
5010	Warning	Invalid Tightening Program Parameter Value	The parameter in the selected tightening program are invalid.	Check the configuration of the selected tightening program to find and to change the value of the parameter.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Program Configuration
5011	Warning	Couldn't prepare program storage in tool	It is not possible to read the current program storage size in the tool, or to prepare the program storage for downloading the updated, or newly selected program to the tool.	Check the tool for supported software version. Reboot the tool. Select the tightening program again. Check network connection for data consistency and quality.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Program Configuration
5020	Info	Main Trigger Is Not The Active Start Source	Generated when configured for push start only and user presses main trigger. Will be generated until user presses the push start.	Press push start to start the tool.	Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Program Configuration
5030	Info	Tightening Program Complexity Exceeds Tool Capacity	The selected tightening program is too complex for the STB tool that is used. Tool will be locked.	Reduce complexity of the tightening program, or choose different program.	Log Display Conf	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Program Configuration
6010	Info	Accessory Connected	Accessory is connected to the controller.		Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Accessory
6020	Info	Accessory Disconnected	Accessory is disconnected from the controller.		Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Accessory
6021	Warning	Fieldbus Offline	No communication with Fieldbus.		Log Display Ack Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC	Accessory
6030	Warning	Accessory Address Collision	Two or more accessories with the same address are connected.	Change address on accessory.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Accessory
6040	Warning	Accessory Communication Error	Intermittent communication error with accessory.	Check cables and connectors.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Accessory
6041	Warning	Fieldbus Error	Communication error with Fieldbus.		Log Display Ack Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Accessory
6042	Warning	Fieldbus Module Mismatch	The installed Fieldbus module does not match with the configured module.	Change the configuration to match with the installed module, or replace the installed module with the correct one.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Accessory
6043	Warning	Fieldbus Output Buffer Overflow	The output buffer used for the Fieldbus communication is exhausted and an overflow of the buffer has occurred. One or more signal updates have been discarded.	Stop Fieldbus communication and Fieldbus diagnostics (if used) to recover the buffer. If this event occurs frequently, check your Fieldbus communication setup, including the PLC program: too frequent updates compared to your update interval can lead to this scenario.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening	Accessory
6044	Warning	Fieldbus Provider ID mismatch	The installed Fieldbus module is not supported.	Connect a supported Atlas Copco fieldbus module.	Log Display Ack	Power Focus 8	Accessory
6045	Warning	Fieldbus frame size too large for current system	The configured frame size in the fieldbus configuration is too large and not supported by the current system type. This may happen when importing configurations from different system types.	Check your general fieldbus configurations and adjust the frame size to and from the system. Perform the necessary adjustments to your mapped virtual stations and their fieldbus configurations to fit the smaller fieldbus frame supported by the current system.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex	Accessory
6050	Info	Wrong Socket Selected	Generated when no or incorrect socket is selected.		Log Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Accessory
6090	Warning	Barcode Scanner Could Not Be Identified	When no unique serial number is found.	Configure the barcode reader device.	Log Display Ack Conf	Flex Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC	Accessory
6500	Warning	Invalid Rule Configuration	Rule configuration is invalid if the virtual station mapped does not exist, invalid cease configuration or if the rule has no triggers or no actions	Verify the configuration of the tool.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl
6501	Warning	Rule Triggered While Running	Running rule is re-triggered by the same trigger.	Disable and enable the rule.	Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl
6502	Info	Failed to execute Action	Rule fails to execute an event when it cannot perform an action on a deleted or non-existent virtual station. This occurs when the virtual station configured for the rule has been removed.	Action is corrected rule is disabled and enabled.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl
6503	Warning	Running Rule Deleted	This event occurs if a currently running rule is deleted. The action will not be reset if running rule is deleted.	No action.	Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl
6504	Warning	Running Rule Disabled	This event occurs if a currently running rule is disabled. The action will not be reset if running rule is disabled.	No action.	Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl
6505	Warning	Running Rule Updated	Running rule updated event if a currently running rule is updated.	No action.	Log Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl
7010	Info	Message Text To Display	General event for displaying of messages.		Display Ack Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl	Message
8135	Info	Machine capability test mode activated	Machine capability test mode has been activated. The mode allows targeted steps within a multistage configuration to not be executed while the mode is active.	Activate Machine capability test mode.	Log Conf Display Ack	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Power Focus XC IxB XB	Controller
8136	Info	Machine capability test mode deactivated	Machine capability test mode has been deactivated. All steps within a multistage program will be executed as normal.	Deactivate Machine capability test mode.	Log Conf Display Ack	Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Flex Power Focus XC IxB XB	Controller
8200	Info	Failed To Open Serial Port	Serial port to be used could not be opened.	Check serial port connections.	Display Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC	Miscellaneous
8300	Warning	Open Protocol client communication timed out	Communication to an Open Protocol client has timed out. No keep alive message or command sent within expected time.	Check controller network connection. Check network setup: firewall and switches. Check client side application software.	Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Miscellaneous
8214	Error	EHMI Software Version Mismatch	EHMI software version does not match in compatibility with the controller.	Update the software version of the EHMI.	Log Display Ack Conf	IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Power Focus XC ToolsControl	Miscellaneous
8400	Info	Controller event	Deleted configuration history.		Log Display Conf	Flex IxB Power Focus 6000 Power Focus 8 Synchronized tightening Power Focus XC Power Focus HC ToolsControl STRw Sync	Controller

Glossary

Conf - Event Codes list

Tells the user whether it is possible to configure the event through the "Configure Event" page.

Available for - Event Codes list

List of products for which the event code is available.

Groups - Event Codes list

Group which the event codes belong to.

Event Description

A short description of the event and why it occurs.

Procedure - Event Codes list

If applicable, the procedure contains an instruction on how to clear the event.

Log - Event Codes list

Tells the user whether the event is to be saved in the event log or not. The value in this list is the default value.

display - Event Codes list

Tells the user whether the event is to be displayed on the screen or not. The value in this list is the default value.

Ack - Event Codes list

Tells the user whether the event must be acknowledged or not before you can proceed. The value in this list is the default value.

Event code

The unique event number.

Type of events - Event Codes list

Type of event: Info, Warning, and Error.

Event name

A descriptive name of the event.

Viewing NOK Ratio

To view NOK ratio:

Go to Reports in the home menu and select NOK Ratio in the left pane.
Select View 10 highest NOK tightening programs.

SPC - Statistical Process Control

The purpose of the built-in SPC function is to give the operator, or quality control staff, data that lets them judge the stability and capability of the assembly process according to standard SPC rules.
By configuring the tool's SPC function it is possible to simplify and do the work directly on the tool without the need of external software.
Since it is possible to use program monitors within the tool as a SPC variable, it is necessary to specify that only variables controlled by the tool show the performance of the system. Other variables show mainly results from other processes. For example, if a torque value is applied to a joint, then SPC of the final torque value and the related results - such as Cp and Cpk - show the performance of the tool on that joint.

Statistical calculations are based on old data stored in the tool.

In this Section

Configuring SPC Parameters

Go to Reports in the home menu and select Statistics in the left pane.
In the SPC Configuration window, enter the following parameters to collect results stored on the tool:
- Number of Subgroups: enter the number of subgroups the statistics calculation is based upon.
  The number of results (Number of Subgroups × Subgroup Size) can range from 2 through 500.
- Subgroup Size: enter the number of tests (samples) necessary to define each point (the average value of the tests in the subgroup) on the SPC charts.
  The subgroup size can range from 2 through 25.
- Frequency: enter how often to start collecting a new subgroup.
  Frequency must be equal or higher than Subgroup size.
  
  For instance, if Frequency is 8 and Subgroup Size is 5, the first 5 data (results) is used for the subgroup. Because of the Frequency =8, the next subgroup starts considering data (results) from the 8th one on, and so on in a loop.

Configuring SPC Variables

Go to Reports in the home menu and select Statistics in the left pane.
Select the Plus icon in the upper-right corner.
The SPC Variable window shows the new variable.
In the Name box, enter the name of the variable.
The name of the variable is the heading of the SPC Variable window.
Select Tightening Program.
The Tightening Program window appears and lists all the multistep tightening programs stored on the tool and available for statistical calculations.
Select the multistep tightening program of the new variable.
Select Virtual Station.
The Virtual Station window appears.
Select the Virtual Station which the results are used from.
Statistics are based on results made by a Virtual Station that has the following license type assigned:
- Process Control
Select Monitor.
The Monitor window appears.
Select one of the following program monitors which the SPC calculation is based on:
- Step monitor peak torque
- Step monitor angle
- Final torque
- Final angle
- Program monitor torque
- Program monitor angle
If the user selects Step monitor peak torque or Step monitor angle, in the Step number box enter the number of the necessary step of the tightening program which read the value from.
If the user uses the result reporters, it is possible to have an effect on the following monitor values: Final torque and Final angle.
Select Edit limits.
The Variable configuration window appears.
For calculations and analysis of the results, set the following limits for each value of interest.

In the Tolerance limits window, set the following limits (used for calculation of the process capabilities Cp and Cpk):

Upper Tolerance Limit (UTL): a user-defined quantity that identifies the highest acceptable value of a product attribute.
Lower Tolerance Limit (LTL): a user-defined quantity that identifies the lowest acceptable value of a product attribute.

In the Control limits window, enable or disable the Auto calculate switch.
If the Auto calculate switch is set to Yes, the control limits are automatically calculated.
If the Auto calculate switch is set to No, set the following limits:

Mean - Upper control limit: a statistically determined measurement that appears as a horizontal dashed line above the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.
Mean - Lower control limit: a statistically determined value that appears as a horizontal dashed line below the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.
Range - Upper control limit: a statistically determined measurement that appears as a horizontal dashed line above the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.
Range - Lower control limit: a statistically determined value that appears as a horizontal dashed line below the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.
Sigma - Upper control limit: a statistically determined measurement that appears as a horizontal dashed line above the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.
Sigma - Lower control limit: a statistically determined value that appears as a horizontal dashed line below the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.

In the Capabilities window, set the following limits:

Cp: the Cp index gives the process capability: it is the number of times the spread of the process is into the tolerance width (Upper tolerance limit - Lower tolerance limit). The higher the value of Cp, the better the process.
Cpk: the Cpk index gives the process capability corrected for the position. It is not useful having a high Cp index if the process setting is way off center in relation to the middle of the tolerance range. A high Cpk index means, then, that you have a good process with a small spread in relation to the tolerance width, and also that it is well centered within that width (Upper tolerance limit - Lower tolerance limit). If Cpk is equal to Cp, the process is set to produce exactly in the middle of the tolerance range.

Calculating Statistics

Go to Reports in the home menu and select Statistics in the left pane.
In the SPC Configuration window, enter the parameters to collect results stored on the tool (Number of Subgroups, Subgroup Size, and Frequency).
Select the Plus icon at the upper-right corner.
The SPC Variable window shows the new variable.
Configure the new SPC Variable.
In the SPC Variable window, select Calculate.
Data is collected from the historical results stored in the controller that are aligned with the criteria set in the SPC Configuration window and SPC Variable window. The values of interest are collected into subgroups of the size set in the SPC Configuration window. The collected tightening results on the controller are used for statistics calculations.

It is not possible to calculate statistics for results from deleted tightening programs or Virtual Stations, unless the results are still stored on the tool.

Only one user at a time can calculate statistics.

Statistics Formulas

Data in a subgroup is calculated as:

Average:
Range = R = max (X_i) - min (X_i), where i=1...n
Standard deviation for a subgroup:
Total overall of the standard deviation:

Where N = total number of observations.

When specified number of subgroups to use for calculations has been collected, the SPC function starts calculations to determine the statistical stability.
Calculations are performed through the following steps: (m = number of subgroups)

Calculation of Average of Average values:
Calculation of Average of Range:
Calculation of Average of Standard deviation:
Calculation of the process capabilities Cp and Cpk with respect to Sigma:

Where:
- is the overall arithmetic average of the observed characteristic values.
- UTL is the Upper Tolerance Limit.
- LTL is the Lower Tolerance Limit.
- The sigma estimation is the mean square standard deviation within the subgroups:
Calculation of the process capabilities Cp and Cpk with respect to Range:

Where for a normal distribution su = sl = 3.

Calculations for control limits if, in the SPC Configuration window, the Auto calculate switch is set to Yes:

X-bar R (Mean)
X-bar R (Range)

X-bar S (Mean)
X-bar S (Sigma)

A₂, A₃, D₃, D₄, B₃, and B₄ are constants (for more information, see the "SPC Calculation Constants" paragraph).

SPC Calculations Constants

Subgroup Size	Divisors for estimate of standard dev.	Factors for Control Limits
		Xbar R			Xbar S
		A2	D3	D4	A3	B3	B4
n	d2	A2	D3	D4	A3	B3	B4
2	1.128	1.880	-	3.267	2.659	-	3.267
3	1.693	1.023	-	2.574	1.954	-	2.568
4	2.059	0.729	-	2.282	1.628	-	2.266
5	2.326	0.577	-	2.114	1.427	-	2.089
6	2.534	0.483	-	2.004	1.287	0.030	1.970
7	2.704	0.419	0.076	1.924	1.182	0.118	1.882
8	2.847	0.373	0.136	1.864	1.099	0.185	1.815
9	2.970	0.337	0.184	1.816	1.032	0.239	1.761
10	3.078	0.308	0.223	1.777	0.975	0.284	1.716
11	3.173	0.285	0.256	1.744	0.927	0.321	1.679
12	3.258	0.266	0.283	1.717	0.886	0.354	1.646
13	3.336	0.249	0.307	1.693	0.850	0.382	1.618
14	3.407	0.235	0.328	1.672	0.817	0.406	1.594
15	3.472	0.223	0.347	1.653	0.789	0.428	1.572
16	3.532	0.212	0.363	1.637	0.763	0.448	1.552
17	3.588	0.203	0.378	1.622	0.739	0.466	1.534
18	3.640	0.194	0.391	1.608	0.718	0.482	1.518
19	3.689	0.187	0.403	1.597	0.698	0.497	1.503
20	3.735	0.180	0.415	1.585	0.680	0.510	1.490
21	3.778	0.173	0.425	1.575	0.663	0.523	1.477
22	3.819	0.167	0.434	1.566	0.647	0.534	1.466
23	3.858	0.162	0.443	1.557	0.633	0.545	1.455
24	3.895	0.157	0.451	1.548	0.619	0.555	1.445
25	3.931	0.153	0.459	1.541	0.606	0.565	1.435

Viewing Statistics Results

Go to Reports in the home menu and select Statistics in the left pane.
In the SPC Configuration window, enter the following parameters: Number of Subgroups, Subgroup Size, and Frequency.
Select the Plus icon at the upper-right corner.
The SPC Variable window shows the new variable.
Configure the new SPC Variable.
In the SPC Variable window, select Calculate.
To show the statistics results, in the SPC Variable window, select View box.
View box shows the date and time which the statistics results have been done.
The statistical results are displayed through a histogram, the XBar-R chart, and the XBar-S chart.
When all calculations on the filtered results are done, they are sent to the user interface and ToolsTalk 2.
The statistics results are locally saved on a Temporary Internet Files folder (not saved on the tool).

Histogram

A histogram is a series of rectangles, each proportional in width to the range of values within a class and proportional in height to the number of samples falling in the class. A Gaussian curve follows the trend of the rectangles. A histogram reveals the amount of variation that any process has within it.
The histogram is useful because it emphasizes and clarifies trends that are not readily discernible in tables.

XBar-R Chart

The XBar-R control chart shows both the mean value (XBar) and the range (R) of a subgroup. This is the most common type of control chart using indiscrete or continuous values. The XBar part of the chart shows any changes in the mean value of the process while the R part shows any changes in the dispersion of the process.
This chart is particularly useful because it shows changes in mean value and dispersion of the process at the same time, making it a very effective method for checking abnormalities in the process.

XBar-S Chart

The XBar-S control chart shows both the mean value (XBar) Chart and the standard deviation (S).
The XBar-S chart is identical to the XBar-R chart except that the R (range) is replaced by an S (standard deviation).

Calculated Statistical Values

The calculated statistical values are displayed in information boxes below the histogram, the XBar-R chart, and the XBar-S chart.

The calculated values depend on the chart which they are read on.

The calculated statistical values are:

Min = minimum value for all collected sample values
Max = maximum value for all collected sample values
Mean =
Mean+3Sigma = + 3*stdDev
Mean-3Sigma = - 3*stdDev
Cp (in XBar-R chart the value is based on range, and in XBar-S chart the value is based on sigma)
Cpk (in XBar-R chart the value is based on range, and in XBar-S chart the value is based on sigma)
Center line = in Range part , and in Sigma part
Target (if available the target value for the monitor)
Standard deviation = Total overall standard deviation = stdDev

Troubleshooting and Service

This section provides assistance in troubleshooting problems, should they arise, and contains information to help you maintain and service the product.

Reference

In this section, you can find miscellaneous useful information.

Terms and Definitions

Term	Synonym	Definition	Note
batch		multiple tightening using the same tightening program and socket
batch sequence	sequence	multiple tightening using a combination of different tightening programs and sockets
controller feature		License for controller-wide features, such as Soft PLC and synchronized tightening.	Are assigned to an entire controller and can be used by all virtual stations.
event		controller and tool status signals
final angle		actual measured angle value at the end of the tightening cycle
final torque		actual measured torque value at the end of the tightening cycle
GUI		user interface made up of interactive graphical elements such as windows, icons and symbols on a display
HMI	Human Machine Interface	user interface to tool or controller	The HMI can be a computer web-based interface or controller touch screen.
IAM	Intelligent Application Module	removable module in controller containing program, configuration parameters and tightening results
line structure		sorting and grouping controllers in structures, folders or sub-folders in ToolsTalk	The line structure is a method for improving the visibility of a large group of controllers in a structured manner.
post view torque		function for monitoring and detecting torque maximum and minimum values before rundown is complete	One purpose of post view torque is the use of a self-locking nut.
tightening program	Parameter set	configuration of parameters and values to control and monitor a single tightening action, and to store the tightening result
push		transfer of data saved in ToolsTalk to the controller memory
QIF	Quality Integrated Fastening	fully integrated line of nutrunners, controllers, accessories and process monitoring tools to guarantee high quality and traceability of tightening in industrial assembly systems	QIF was developed at Atlas Copco and is preferably used in motor vehicle industry and other assembly situations where many joints are critical. The QIF concept also includes process monitoring and documentation.
QIF accessory		accessory for operator communication and guidance used in QIF	Accessory products used for communication between system and operator. For example: scanner, operator panel, stacklight and socket selector. The communication provides improved quality and traceability in the assembly process.
Re-hit detection		detection of re-tightening of an already tightened joint
rotate		tightening strategy which rotates the tool head.	Rotate is mainly used for test or demonstration purposes.
rundown complete		end of the rundown step, when the screw head is in contact with the surface and the tightening step begins
rundown step		step when a bolt enters the thread until the bolt head touches the surface
snug		screw or bolt is approximately finger-tight to the surface
socket selector		QIF accessory, consisting of a socket tray with lamps, that can be used to guide an operator to the correct socket
soft start		start tightening at slow speed during a specified rotation angle	The function helps the bolt to enter the thread in a well controlled way and may prevent unwanted ergonomic tool movement when the trigger is pressed.
stacklight		QIF accessory, which handles the communication between operator and controller through digital signals like lamps, buttons, switches and buzzer
target		desired result of a tightening	The target is expressed in torque or angle.
target angle		desired angle value at the end of the tightening cycle, measured from a reference point
target torque		desired torque value at the end of the tightening cycle
tightening step		step from when a bolt head has reached the surface until the tightening has reached the desired target torque or target angle
tightening strategy		algorithm which continuously controls and monitors the tightening process	The user can select a strategy optimized for the joint and program certain parameters.
virtual station	virtual controller	software abstraction of a physical controller to behave like multiple controllers	A controller can have only one cable tool connected to it, but several wireless tools. Each tool is connected to its own virtual station.
virtual station type		License containing a bundle of controller features.	This license is required for running a virtual station.
virtual station feature		License for individual features.	Can be used to complement Virtual station type licenses.

Input Signals

Abort Sequence - 10012

When a Batch sequence abort request is received, the Batch sequence functionality aborts the batch sequence only after getting the ongoing tightening result.

Name in SoftPLC: ABORT_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Abort Sequence and Clear Results - 10127

When signal "Abort sequence and clear results" is set, the ongoing sequence is aborted and signals related to "Clear results" are cleared.

Name in SoftPLC:ABORT_SEQ_AND_CLEAR_RES

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Acknowledge Events - 10004

Acknowledge of an event.

Name in SoftPLC: ACKNOWLEDGE_EVENT

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Activate Tool Scanner - 10075

Activates the tool scanner through an external source.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVATE_TOOL_SCANNER

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Decrement - 10002

Incrementally decreases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_DECREMENT

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Increment - 10001

Incrementally increases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_INCREMENT

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Bypass Identifier - 10123

In source batch string used to bypass an identifier string in string receiving sequence.

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Bypass Tightening Program - 10008

Skips the next tightening program in the running batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: BYPASS_PSET

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Dynamic Batch Size - 10074

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	16

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

External OK - 10063

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_OK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

ID for Dynamic Batch Size - 10073

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE_TPID

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Integer	1	16
TreatZeroAsOne	State	Integer	1	16

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Lock Loosening - 20003

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tightening - 20002

Tool locked for tightening by digital input.

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active High - 20004

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active Low - 20061

Locks the tool when this signal is low.

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Manual Mode - 10061

Used to set the Virtual Station in manual mode.

If the signal is True (high) the signal 101 - Manual mode is high.
If the signal is False (low) the signal 101 - Manual mode is low.

Name in SoftPLC: SET_MANUAL_MODE

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Relevant Information

Manual Mode - 101

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Master Unlock - 10005

Master Unlock is an input signal which unlocks the following functions and signals.

FUNCTIONS:

Disable loosening at OK tightening
Disable loosening at NOK tightening
Disable tightening
Max consecutive NOK
Tool Lock on Sequence complete

SIGNALS:

20001 - Pending Event Acknowledge Lock
20002 - Lock Tightening
20003 - Lock Loosening
20004 - Lock Tool Active High
20013 - WorkTask Lock Tightening
20014 - WorkTask Lock Loosening
20015 - Batch Done lLock
20018 - Open Protocol Lock
20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening
20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening
20022 - Disable Loosening At OK Tight
20023 - Too Many NOK Tightenings Lock
20033 - Line Control Lock
20034 - Locked By Alternative Identifier

Name in SoftPLC: MASTER_UNLOCK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset All Identifiers - 10115

In Source batch string used to reset all received string identifiers from string receiving sequence at once. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_ALL_IDENTIFIERS

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch - 10003

Resets the batch counter to 0. No batch OK (nxOK). If batch OK is activated, it will be deactivated.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch Sequence - 10053

Resets the Batch Sequence. Unlocks a tool that is locked by Tool Lock on Complete.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Bistable Relay - 10022

Reset the bistable relay output.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BISTABLE_RELAY

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Latest Identifier - 10114

In Source batch string used to reset latest received string from string receiving sequence. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_LATEST_IDENTIFIER

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Sequence Status - 10118

Resets signals Batch Sequence Done/OK/NOK and Sequence Aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_SEQUENCE_STATUS

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset too many loosenings lock - 10151

Used to unlock a tool that has reached too many consecutive loosenings configured in the General Virtual station configuration.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_TOO_MANY_LOOSENINGS

Signal type	Value type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE
Automation Rules: TRUE

Reset Too Many NOK - 10013

Reset the batch after receiving lock Too Many NOK

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_TOO_MANY_NOK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input - 10020

Selects Tightening Program withing Source Tightening/Batch within sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_INPUT_VALUE

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Integer	1	16
TreatZeroAsOne	State	Integer	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Select Input Bit 0 - 10016

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_0

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 1 - 10017

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_1

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 2 - 10018

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_2

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 3 - 10019

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_3

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 4 - 10066

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_4

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 5 - 10067

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_5

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 6 - 10068

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_6

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 7 - 10069

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_7

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 8 - 10070

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_8

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 9 - 10071

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_9

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Next Identifier Number - 10116

It is possible to use the signal Select Next Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

Batch Sequence
Source Tightening
Source Batch
- Number Identifier method
- String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Next Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Next Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number.
If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 1,2,4,5,1,2,4... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the next identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task.
The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the next larger one.

When the biggest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next bigger identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the identifier number has been added to the Source Tightening list, but no tightening program has ever been assigned to it, it is skipped while looping through the Source Tightening list.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Next Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Next Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Next Identifier Number iterates and selects 1,2,4,8,0,1,2...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Next Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_NEXT_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Previous Identifier Number - 10117

It is possible to use the signal Select Previous Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

Batch Sequence
Source Tightening
Source Batch
- Number Identifier method
- String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 5,4,2,1,5,4,2... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the previous identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task.
The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the previous lower one.

When the smallest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next smaller identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number iterates and selects 8,4,2,1,0,8,4...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Previous Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_PREVIOUS_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Set Bistable Relay - 10021

Set the bistable relay output.

Name in SoftPLC: SET_BISTABLE_RELAY

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Loosening on Disable - 10150

Used to enable loosenings for a tool that has been disabled due to the Tightening setting Disable loosening in the General Virtual station configuration.

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_LOOSENING_ON_DISABLE

Signal type	Value type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE
Automation Rules: TRUE

Unlock Tightening on Disable - 10149

Used to only enable tightening for a tool that has been disabled due to the Tightening setting Disable tightening in the General Virtual station configuration.

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TIGHTENING_ON_DISABLE

Signal type	Value type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE
Automation Rules: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Complete - 10051

Unlocks a tool that is locked by "Tool Lock on Complete".

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_COMPLETE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Disable - 10059

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_DISABLE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Set Zero Position - 10135

For hand-held tools, the input signal Set Zero Position keeps the current position of the tools as home position. The signal is silently ignored if sent during an ongoing tightening.

For fixtured tools, the input signal Set Zero Position keeps the current position of the tools as home position. The signal affects all the tools in the system, regardless of the virtual station. The signal is silently ignored by fixtured tools that are part of an ongoing tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: IN_EXTERNAL_SET_ZERO_POSITION

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Toggles Machine Capability Mode - 10152

Toggles machine capability test mode.

Name in SoftPLC: MACHINE_CAPABILITY_TEST_MODE_TOGGLE

Signal type	Value type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Internal I/O: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
User Display: FALSE
Soft Selector: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE
Tool LED: FALSE
Tool Buzzer: FALSE
Tool Ring: TRUE
Fieldbus: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
Manual Mode: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Tool Vibrator: FALSE
Automation Rules: FALSE

Output Signals

Batch Completed - 30

Batch Completed is an output signal which is triggered when the batch is complete.
The batch result status (OK or NOK) has no effect on the Batch Completed signal.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Completed NOK - 37

Batch finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_NOK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Completed OK - 36

Batch finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_OK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Count - 31

Batch Count is an output signal which shows the current number of tightening in the batch.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COUNT

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Batch Running - 32

Indicates that a batch in a batch sequence is running.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_RUNNING

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Completed NOK - 46

Batch sequence finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_NOK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Completed OK - 45

Batch sequence finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_OK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Done - 48

Indicates when a sequence is completed, both in case Batch Sequence Completed OK and Batch Sequence Completed NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_COMPLETED

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	Event	Boolean	1	1
Invert	Event	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Running - 47

Indicates if the Batch Sequence is running or not.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCHSEQUENCE_RUNNING

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Bistable Relay - 40

Bistable Relay is a signal controlled by the inputs "Set Bistable Relay" and "Reset Bistable Relay".
After receiving the input "Set Bistable Relay", Bistable Relay signal is set to True.
After receiving the input "Reset Bistable Relay", Bistable Relay signal is set to False.

If "Set Bistable Relay" or "Reset Bistable Relay" goes low, the Bistable relay keeps its state.
The state for the Bistable relay changes when "Set Bistable Relay" or "Reset Bistable Relay" goes high.

After restarting the controller, the Bistable relay is set to False as default.

Name in SoftPLC: BISTABLE_RELAY

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Calibration Alarm - 138

The Calibration alarm from the Tool maintenance configuration. Provides a reminder for when it is time to calibrate the tool.

Name in SoftPLC: CALIBRATION_ALARM

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Configuration Version - 88

Name in SoftPLC: CONFIGURATION_VERSION

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	32

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Confirm loosening - 206

Indicate if loosening is selected and possible to start. That is, a loosening sync mode or loosening program exists and are selected.

Name in SoftPLC: CONFIRM_LOOSENING

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Controller Switched On - 42

Set to true at start up of IO Exchange

Name in SoftPLC: IO_ON

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Current Running Batch - 180

Current Running Batch is an output signal which shows the index of the current running batch in a sequence.
If the user uses a socket selector, "Zero" appears if none, more than one, or wrong socket is selected.
If the user uses batch mode and a batch is running, "1" appears for Source Tightening configurations.

Name in SoftPLC: CURRENT_RUNNING_BATCH_IX

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Clutch Settings Alarm - 248

The clutch settings alarm from the tool maintenance configuration. Provides a reminder to update the clutch settings of the tool.

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Direction Switch CCW - 13

The direction switch on the tool is turned in counter clockwise direction.

Name in SoftPLC: DIRECTION_SWITCH_CCW

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Direction Switch CW - 12

The direction switch on the tool is turned in clockwise direction.

Name in SoftPLC: DIRECTION_SWITCH_CW

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Event Present - 161

Indicates if event is triggered. It is only triggered on accessories if event requires an ACK.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_PRESENT

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

High Angle - 10

Angle result is too high.

Name in SoftPLC: HIGH_ANGLE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

High Torque - 7

Torque result is higher than maximum torque limit.

Name in SoftPLC: HIGH_TORQUE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Identifier Received - 100

Name in SoftPLC: IDENTIFIER_RECEIVED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Last Received Identifier String - 187

Set directly when an identifier has been received in the work-task.
For Source batch-string, it is set at every scanning in scan process, thus it is changed for every scanning and sent even if it does not match in length.
String set is in raw format and not only "saved positions" in the string.
For other work-tasks this signal is equal to Active Identifier String signal.

Name in SoftPLC: LAST_RECEIVED_ID_STRING

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	String	8	800
IdentifierU32Hnw	State	String	8	800
IdentifierU32	State	String	8	800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

License Server Connection Lost - 134

Indicates that the connection to the Atlas Copco license server has been lost or the synchronization has failed. The signal is cleared when the License manager synchronization has been done successfully

Name in SoftPLC: LICENSE_SERVER_CONN_LOST

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening Disabled - 184

Loosening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the loosening is externally locked by any of the following signals:

20003 - Lock Loosening
20004 - Lock Tool Active High
20033 - Line Control Lock
20018 - Open Protocol Lock
20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening
20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening
20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_DISABLED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening Enabled - 185

Loosening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the loosening is not externally locked by any of the following signals:

20003 - Lock Loosening
20004 - Lock Tool Active High
20033 - Line Control Lock
20018 - Open Protocol Lock
20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening
20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening
20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_ENABLED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening is Locked - 28

The loosening is disabled.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening NOK - 74

NOK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_NOK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening OK - 70

OK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_OK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Low Angle - 9

Angle result is lower than minimum angle limit.

Name in SoftPLC: LOW_ANGLE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Low Torque - 6

Torque result is lower than minimum torque limit.

Name in SoftPLC: LOW_TORQUE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Manual Mode - 101

Indicates on any supported and configured accessory the Virtual Station status for manual mode

Name in SoftPLC: MANUAL_MODE

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Max consecutive loosenings reached - 245

Indicates that the maximum consecutive loosenings have been reached and that the tool will be locked until reset by using the signal Reset too many loosenings lock – 10151, or Master unlock – 10005.

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_CONSECUTIVE_LOOSENING_REACHED

Signal type	Value type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE
Tool LED: TRUE
Tool Buzzer: TRUE
Tool Vibrator: TRUE
Automation Rules: TRUE

Max Consecutive NOK Reached - 35

Indicates Max coherent NOK tightening counter is reachead.

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_COHERENT_NOK_REACHED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Open End in Open Position - 89

Open End tool in open position.

Name in SoftPLC: OPEN_END_IN_OPEN_POSITION

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Open Protocol Disconnected - 95

If Open Protocol is set to off in the Virtual Station, "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to False.
If Open Protocol is turned on in the Virtual Station the "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to True.
When at least one client (several Open Protocol clients can connect to the same Virtual Station) is connected the "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to False.

Name in SoftPLC: OPEN_PROTOCOL_DISCONNECTED

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Program End - 168

This signal indicates the torque level when the tightening cycle is complete. A timer - Program end timeout - starts when the torque falls below this level. Tightening is complete when the torque has fallen below the level for Program end torque and stayed there until Program end timeout has been reached.

Name in SoftPLC: PROGRAM_END

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Program Start - 132

Defines the starting level for a tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: PROGRAM_START

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Ready to Start - 29

If a tool is connected to the virtual station, there is not any active tightening locks, emergency stop is not activated, and a valid Tightening Program is selected, this signal indicates that it is possible to start a tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: READY_TO_START

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Remaining Batch - 33

Remaining tightenings in a batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: REMAINING_BATCH

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Rundown Angle High - 165

This signal is active if the rundown angle on the program level is higher than the set one.

Name in SoftPLC: RUNDOWN_ANGLE_HIGH

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Rundown Angle Low - 166

This signal is active if the rundown angle on the program level is lower than the set one.

Name in SoftPLC: RUNDOWN_ANGLE_LOW

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number - 213

The identifier number of a selected tightening program; 0 if no identifier number selected.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Integer	1	16
TreatZeroAsOne	State	Integer	1	16

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters. Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 0 - 214

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_0

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 1 - 215

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_1

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 2 - 216

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_2

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 3 - 217

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_3

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 4 - 218

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_4

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 5 - 219

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_5

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 6 - 220

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_6

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 7 - 221

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_7

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 8 - 222

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_8

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Identifier Number Bit 9 - 223

Bit pattern showing selected identifier number.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_IDENTIFIER_NUMBER_BIT_9

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 0 - 139

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_0

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 1 - 140

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_1

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 2 - 141

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_2

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 3 - 142

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_3

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 4 - 143

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_4

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 5 - 144

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_5

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 6 - 145

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_6

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 7 - 146

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_7

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 8 - 147

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_8

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 9 - 163

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_9

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Id - 84

Shows the index of the selected batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_BATCH_SEQUENCE_ID

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Integer	1	16
TreatZeroAsOne	State	Integer	1	16

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Selected Tightening Program - 69

The actual id of a selected tightening program; 0 if no tightening program selected.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PSET_ID

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Integer	1	16
TreatZeroAsOne	State	Integer	1	16

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 0 - 148

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_0

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 1 - 149

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_1

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 2 - 150

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_2

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 3 - 151

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_3

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 4 - 152

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_4

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 5 - 153

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_5

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 6 - 154

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_6

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 7 - 155

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_7

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 8 - 156

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_8

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 9 - 157

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_9

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Sequence Aborted - 160

Output signal indicating if sequence was aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: SEQUENCE_ABORTED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Service Indicator Alarm - 137

Service alarm configured in the Tool maintenance, provides a mechanism to remind the users when it is time to service the tool.

Name in SoftPLC: SERVICE_INDICATOR_ALARM

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Size of Sequence - 181

Shows the size of the currently running sequence. Only set when a sequence is loaded and not reset when sequence is done.

Name in SoftPLC: SIZE_OF_RUNNING_SEQUENCE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Socket Selector Disconnected Lock - 20039

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Software Major Version - 86

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MAJOR_VERSION

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	32

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Software Minor Version - 87

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MINOR_VERSION

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	32

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Software Release Version - 85

Version of the software running.

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_RELEASE_VERSION

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	32

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Station Ready - 71

Indicates when the Virtual Station is ready.

Name in SoftPLC: STATION_READY

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Thread Direction CCW - 26

Selected tightening program has counterclockwise chosen as thread direction.

Name in SoftPLC: THREAD_DIRECTION_CCW

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Disabled - 182

Tightening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the tightening is externally disabled by any of the following signals:

20002 - Lock Tightening
20004 - Lock Tool Active High
20033 - Line Control Lock
20018 - Open Protocol Lock
20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening
20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening
20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DISABLED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Enabled - 183

Tightening Enabled is an output signal which is activated when the tightening is not externally disabled by any of the following signals:

20002 - Lock Tightening
20004 - Lock Tool Active High
20033 - Line Control Lock
20018 - Open Protocol Lock
20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening
20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening
20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_ENABLED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening is Locked - 27

The tightening is disabled; it is not possible to make any tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening NOK - 4

At least one result of the tightening is outside the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_NOK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening OK - 3

The result of the tightening is within the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_OK

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Time High - 135

Indicates if NOK tightenings occurred due to execution time exceeding the maximum allowed.

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Battery Low - 90

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_BATTERY_LOW

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Connected - 73

Indicates if a tool is connected or not to a Virtual Station.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_CONNECTED

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Disabled - 158

Tool Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the tool is externally disabled by any of the following signals:

20002 - Lock Tightening
20003 - Lock Loosening
20004 - Lock Tool Active High
20033 - Line Control Lock
20018 - Open Protocol Lock
20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening
20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening
20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening
20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening
20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_DISABLED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Enabled - 159

Tool Enabled is an output signal which is activated when the tool is not externally disabled by any of the following signals:

20002 - Lock Tightening
20003 - Lock Loosening
20004 - Lock Tool Active High
20033 - Line Control Lock
20018 - Open Protocol Lock
20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening
20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening
20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening
20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening
20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ENABLED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Health OK - 103

Tool Health OK is High when there is no tool error present, while Tool Health OK is Low when any of the following tool errors are set:

Tool Overheated
Tool Requires motor tuning
Open End not tuned
Tool parameter file not supported
Tool battery empty
Tool trigger supervision failure
Tool cable not supported
Tool memory failure
Tool memory corrupt
Tool service interval expired
Tool software version mismatch

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool LED Mirror Green - 98

Signal showing the tool green LED status on an accessory.

The Tool LED Mirror Green signal is set to True, if the tool green LED is ON/flashing.
The Tool LED Mirror Green signal is set to False, if the tool green LED is OFF.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RESULT_LED_GREEN

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool LED Mirror Red - 97

Signal showing the tool red LED status on an accessory.

The Tool LED Mirror Red signal is set to True, if the tool red LED is ON/flashing.
The Tool LED Mirror Red signal is set to False, if the tool red LED is OFF.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RESULT_LED_RED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool LED Mirror Yellow - 99

Signal showing the tool yellow LED status on an accessory.

The Tool LED Mirror Yellow signal is set to True, if the tool yellow LED is ON/flashing.
The Tool LED Mirror Yellow signal is set to False, if the tool yellow LED is OFF.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RESULT_LED_YELLOW

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Loosening - 22

Indicates that the tool is loosening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_LOOSENING

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Rotation CCW - 25

Tool rotation direction is counterclockwise for left-handed threaded screws.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ROTATION_CCW

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Rotation CW - 24

Tool rotation direction is clockwise for right-handed threaded screws.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ROTATION_CW

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Running - 23

Indicates that the tool is rotating (clockwise [CW] or counter-clockwise [CCW]).

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RUNNING

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Tightening - 21

Indicates that the tool is tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_TIGHTENING

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tools in Zero Position - 210

The output signal Tools in Zero Position is available only for hand-held tool.

The output signal Tools in Zero Position defines if the tool is in home position - for example, at the end of a forward or backward position step.
The signal is not updated in real time, so if the tool for any reason is moved out of position, the signal will not work.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOLS_IN_ZERO_POSITION

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

ToolsNet Connection Lost - 133

Indicates if enabled connection between ToolsNet and controller got interrupted or is working as expected.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOLSNET_CONNECTION_LOST

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

ToolsTalk Connection Lost - 208

Indicates if enabled connection between ToolsTalk and controller got interrupted or is working as expected.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOLSTALK_CONNECTION_LOST

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Total Number of Tightenings - 31018

Total number of the tightenings performed by the tool over its entire lifetime.

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Integer	8	32

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Total Remaining Sequence Counter - 205

The amount of remaining tightenings to be completed in a batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: TOTAL_REMAINING_SEQ_COUNT

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	16

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Total Sequence Counter - 204

The amount of completed tightenings in a batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: TOTAL_SEQ_COUNTER

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	16

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

Total Sequence Size - 203

The total amount of tightenings to be completed in a batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: TOTAL_SEQ_SIZE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	16

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE

Trigger pressed - 11

Indicates that the tool trigger has been pressed.

Name in SoftPLC: TRIGGER_PRESSED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output Signals

Clear Results - 39

Clears status of other signals set to next tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: CLEAR_RESULTS

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Open Protocol Commands - 10060

Disables the possibility to send commands over Open Protocol to the Virtual Station.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_OPEN_PRTCOL_CMDS

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

External Identifier - 10045

The string sent in External identifier is included in the result as VIN number. It is possible to provide up to 2 identifiers to be passed from Fieldbus for task selection.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_IDENTIFIER

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	String	8	800
IdentifierU32Hnw	State	String	8	800
IdentifierU32	State	String	8	800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: FALSE
Operator Panel: FALSE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: FALSE

External Monitored 1 - 10035

External Monitored 1 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_1

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 2 - 10036

External Monitored 2 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_2

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 3 - 10037

External Monitored 3 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_3

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 4 - 10038

External Monitored 4 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_4

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 5 - 10039

External Monitored 5 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_5

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 6 - 10040

External Monitored 6 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_6

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 7 - 10041

External Monitored 7 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_7

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 8 - 10042

External Monitored 8 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_8

Converter	Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Standard	State	Boolean	1	1
Invert	State	Boolean	1	1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Flash Tool Green LED (external protocol) - 10058

Name in SoftPLC: FLASH_TOOL_GREEN_LED

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 1 - 50

Input/Output 1 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_1

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 10 - 59

Input/Output 10 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_10

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 2 - 51

Input/Output 2 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_2

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 3 - 52

Input/Output 3 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_3

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 4 - 53

Input/Output 4 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_4

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 5 - 54

Input/Output 5 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_5

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 6 - 55

Input/Output 6 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_6

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 7 - 56

Input/Output 7 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_7

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 8 - 57

Input/Output 8 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_8

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 9 - 58

Input/Output 9 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_9

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Integer	1	8

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 1 - 169

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_1

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 10 - 178

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_10

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 2 - 170

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_2

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 3 - 171

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_3

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 4 - 172

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_4

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 5 - 173

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_5

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 6 - 174

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_6

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 7 - 175

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_7

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 8 - 176

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_8

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 9 - 177

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_9

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
Event	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: FALSE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool in Production Space - 93

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_IN_PRODUCT_SPACE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool in Work Space - 92

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_IN_WORK_SPACE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE
Indicator Box: TRUE
Internal I/O: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
Tool Functions: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
Stacklight: TRUE
TLS Tag: TRUE
I/O Expander: TRUE

Machine Capability Test Mode Active - 10148

Machine capability test mode active.

Name in SoftPLC: MACHINE_CAPABILITY_TEST_MODE_ACTIVE

Signal Type	Value Type	Size Min [bit]	Size Max [bit]
State	Boolean	1	1

Devices

Internal I/O: TRUE
Stacklight: TRUE
Operator Panel: TRUE
User Display: FALSE
Soft Selector: FALSE
I/O Expander: TRUE
Tool LED: TRUE
Tool Buzzer: TRUE
Tool Ring: FALSE
Fieldbus: TRUE
ST Selector: FALSE
TLS Tag: FALSE
Manual Mode: FALSE
Indicator Box: FALSE
Tool Vibrator: FALSE
Automation Rules: TRUE

List of Third-Party Licenses

IxB Software controllers incorporate third-party software components whose licenses require us to publish copies of the licensing language and/or copyright notices. A list of the included third-party components and relevant license texts are available in the software delivery package.

Category	SysLog classification
Error	Alert, Critical, Emergency, Error
Warning	Warning
Info	Informational, Notice